JP2022111870A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: performance control means for controlling a performance of a game; display means (a display device 41) capable of displaying information regarding a game; a start winning area that game balls can enter; and start storage means capable of storing start storage that becomes an execution right of a game up to a predetermined upper-limit number on the basis of entry of game balls into the start winning area. The performance control means can display a start storage display part 90 capable of displaying information regarding start storage on the display means, and the start storage display part 90 includes first display (decorative special pattern start storage display 83a) displayed when start storage exists, and second display (waiting storage display part 83) that can be displayed regardless of presence or absence of start storage, and can display first information as information not related to a game under execution on the second display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 94

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In this pachinko machine, a starting memory, which is the right to execute the game, is generated based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (starting winning), and a special game is executed based on the starting memory. If the result is derived, a special game state is generated in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player.
In addition, it is possible to display the information of the starting memory on the display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-180269 A

However, simply displaying the information of the starting memory has not been able to improve interest. An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling game production;
a display means capable of displaying information about a game;
A starting winning area in which a game ball can win a prize;
starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area;
The production control means is
a starting memory display section capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the display means;
In the starting memory display unit,
a first display displayed when the starting memory exists;
a second display displayable regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory;
It is characterized in that the first information, which is information unrelated to the game being executed, can be displayed on the second display.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view showing the details of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of a special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of a big hit design, the distribution rate of a small hit design, and the distribution rate of a support per design. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining transition of a group of change selection tables; It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. It is a figure explaining the number of times of support when a support hit is derived during general electricity support. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining hard random number acquisition processing; It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit determination process and a small-hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining production mode information check processing. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure normal processing shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a pseudo-continuous effect is executed as a special effect performed during a variable display game in which the result is "support hit". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional production performed after the special-figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" is over. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of production|presentation. It is a figure explaining the change of the visibility in an example of production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a second modification of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting entrance switch common process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining support hit determination processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the third modification of the support hit determination, and is a diagram showing the distribution ratio. It is a figure explaining the modification 3 of support hit determination, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a big-hit flag 1 setting process and a big-hit flag 2 setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 3 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 4 of a support hit determination, Comprising: It is a figure which shows a distribution rate. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a diagram for explaining the modification 4 of the support hit determination, and is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a diagram showing distribution ratios. FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining another modified example 11, and is a flowchart for explaining specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining other modification 11, Comprising: It is a flowchart explaining a small-hit remaining ball process. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the modification of the number-of-supports notification production. It is a figure explaining the modification of the number-of-supports notification production. It is a figure explaining the modification of the number-of-supports notification production. It is a figure explaining the modification of the number-of-supports notification production. It is a figure explaining the modification of decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of decoration identification information (large design). It is a figure explaining the modification of decoration identification information (large design). It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of operation|movement of the special variable prize-winning apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12
is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

A display plate 350 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14 . The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a light guide plate is used to make an image emerge when light is introduced from the side edge, but it may be configured by a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 does not display a predetermined display, it is transparent so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game board 30 behind. Then, when a predetermined display is made on the display board 350,
The visibility of the game board 30 behind the predetermined display portion is lowered. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through a predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for the outflow. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with a performance button 25 incorporating a performance button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The performance button 25 also incorporates a driving source for vibrating the performance button 25 . That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state). can be

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a hitting ball shooting device, and the like. Furthermore, the front frame 12
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the.

To the right of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. do. Also, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29,
In the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 3), an effect or the like can be performed in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 8 that serves as an attachment base for various members.
0 is provided. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to approximately the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 for forming a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
Further, a board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 for effecting a game by operating it. This board effect device 44 is operable between a position above the center case 40 and a position indicated by a dotted line, which is a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning holes 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal solenoid 37
Although it is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by moving forward and backward (slides) by c, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "H" by the general electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of ".
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (not shown) that advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction.
By doing so, the upper big winning hole is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. First special variable winning device 3
8, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper big prize opening, the player is given a predetermined A game value (prize ball) is provided. A game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 5) is provided with a lever member actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. Occurs (in this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

In addition, inside the upper grand prize winning port, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) is provided for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state where the game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
At 9, an opening/closing member (not shown) advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction, thereby converting the lower big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening. In addition, the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32
In the lower right corner of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
And a collective display device 50 is provided for executing the normal pattern variation display game.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 display for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). This game state display section 56
, the first game state display unit 56a (C6) that informs the player of the advantageous hitting method (playing method corresponding to the game state) between left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting, time saving state (variation time shortening) The second game state display portion 56b (C7) for notifying that the function is activated), and the third game state display portion for notifying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. 56c
(D7) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 is a general figure display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the general figure fluctuation display game
, and a normal pattern holding indicator 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 is the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, and A7 are lit (the LED lamp A
0, A2, A4, and A6 are extinguished) alternately to indicate that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52 is the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, and B7 are lit (the LED lamp B
0, B2, B4, and B6 are extinguished states) are alternately switched to indicate that they are fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, if the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending display 53 shows the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = pending number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 pending display device 54 is the normal fluctuation winning device 3 that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls to 7 (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. Display by
The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

When the round display unit 55 is not in the special game state, all the LEDs (LED lamp D
0 to D3) are turned off, and during the special game state, LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the result, as shown in FIG. The round display section 55 may be configured with a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

The general pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 57 is, during the fluctuation display of the general pattern fluctuation display game,
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(g), by alternately changing the pattern number for variation, alternately switching between a mode in which the LED lamp D5 is lit and a mode in which the LED lamps D4 and D6 are lit. Display that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example.
If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate the hit, and if the result is "miss", a plurality of LEs
Any one of D (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of undigested balls (normal pattern starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57. For example, FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for the random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC power supply that generates a DC voltage of 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure;
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed,
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-win effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 also generates a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special-picture variation display game, a special-picture random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special-picture variation display game ( Random number generation for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing An interface chip that is connected to an out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. (Proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a and the gate switch 3
4 a is input to the second input port 123 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signals of the specific area switch 38 d , the remaining ball outlet switch 38 e and the out ball detection switch 32 a are input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation part has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
It is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, press R while turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (depressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is entered, in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated ( ), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, the state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
2 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used.
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a)
, is also supplied to a test firing tester (not shown) through the relay board 70. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the game microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held at the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, in the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38 and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the internal lever member and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value This is a port for output.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d for outputting, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V, the fifth driver 138e has D as a power supply voltage.
C5V is supplied from power supply 400 .
Also, the second driver 138b for driving the segment lines of the collective display device 50 has DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and
It instructs the contents of the output video to the DP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, manages the performance time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 .
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having LEDs (light emitting diodes) (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) is provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board production device 44 (
For example, there is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41 . These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc.
The function of detecting the on / off state of and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sending the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 is provided that has an input function.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Also, if you do not distinguish between the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result)
called. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). Variable winning device 38
, 39 is set (the device for continuously actuating the character is activated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off.
In addition, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory,
It is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines, and is used in this specification as a term having the same meaning.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from the ball shooting device. The launched game ball is in the game area 3
2 flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places, normal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning winning the device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39,
It flows into an out port 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning Players can aim to win a prize through the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general winning port 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal map start memory in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50 . In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the general pattern indicator 57 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the general pattern variation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
The normal map display 57 is composed of the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal pattern indicator 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern corresponding to the state of the result of the loss on the normal pattern display device 57 .

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second starting memory forming a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the special pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random value is stored in the RAM 111C as first start memory and second start memory. And, the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 and the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and in the display device 41 of the center case 40 Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) special figure 1 variable display game ( 1st special figure fluctuation display game) execution control, and special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (second start winning area) It constitutes execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means changes the special figure 2 variation display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. are configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole 36 . In addition, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

FIG. 7 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. And for the big hit, for example,
As shown in (b), as a big hit pattern (result mode of the big hit), a high probability A big hit in which the high probability A big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, a high probability B big hit in which the high probability B big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, and a normal big hit pattern is stopped. There are three types of normal jackpots displayed. Also, for a small hit, for example, FIG.
), there are two types of small winning symbols (small winning results mode): a small winning A symbol in which the small winning A symbol is stopped and displayed, and a small winning B symbol in which the small winning B symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7(d), for example, as shown in FIG. 7(d), the support winning A symbol is stop-displayed as the support winning symbol (result form of the support winning result), and the support winning B symbol is stopped and displayed. There are three types of support hit B and support hit C in which the support hit C symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the support hit is neither a big hit nor a small hit, but can be said to be a type of loss (a result other than a special result).

The probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (variability operation area) and it is likely to become a high probability state (variability condition) after the special game state, and the normal is the specific area (variability operation area) Possibility of inflow of game balls is low, indicating that it is difficult to enter a high probability state (probability variable state) after the end of the special game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area). If game balls do not flow in, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, the high probability state occurs if the game balls flow into the specific area.

In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the variable probability A jackpot and the variable probability B jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in a specific round and the specific area (variable probability operation area) is opened. conduct. Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area). And the first in a round other than a specific round
V-less opening is performed in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (jackpot game state) based on the derivation of the normal jackpot, the first
Short opening with V to open the special variable winning device 38 and open the specific area (probability variable operation area) is performed. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
In the special game state (small hit game state) based on the derivation of the small hit, the second special variable winning device 3
9 is released.

FIG. 7(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but the special figure 1
and special figure 2 may be different.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", "setting 2", and "setting 3". can be different. Also, in FIG. 7(a), the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 4", "setting 5", and "setting 6". can be different. Also, for example, the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 1" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "setting 2" are the first distribution rate (for example, low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190/6
5536), and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 3" and the distribution rate of the jackpot in "Setting 4" are the second
Distribution ratio (for example, low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/65536),
The third distribution rate (for example,
Low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536).

Also, in FIG. 7(a), the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different. In addition, in FIG. 7(a), the distribution rate of the small hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), but different It's okay to be there.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), the allocation rate per support is the same regardless of the set probability value, but may be different.
That is, in the present embodiment, only the winning probability of the big win is changed by changing the probability set value, and the probability of the small win and the support win is not changed.
Also, in FIG. 7(a), it is possible to win a support hit only in a low probability state, but it may be possible to win in a high probability state. In this case, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is low probability state, it may be higher than when it is high probability state, and when it is low probability state and when it is high probability state , or may be lower in the case of the low-probability state than in the case of the high-probability state.

FIG. 7(b) is an example of the distribution rate of the jackpot types. In FIG. 7(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Moreover, FIG.
), the distribution rate of the jackpot type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 7(c) is an example of the distribution rate of the small hit type. In FIG. 7(c), the distribution rate of the small hit type is common between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. Moreover, FIG.
), the distribution rate of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 7(d) is an example of distribution ratios for types of support hits. In FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of the type of support hit is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
Also, in FIG. 7(d), the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 1 is C
Although it is higher than the distribution rate of , the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 1 may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in special figure 2, or special figure 2 It may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support at . Also, in FIG. 7 (d), the distribution rate of A per support in Special Figure 1 and B per support in Special Figure 1
are the same, but may be different. In addition, in FIG. 7 (d), the distribution rate of the support per A in the special figure 2 and the distribution rate of the support per B in the special figure 2 are the same, but they may be different. Also, the sorting rate of the types of support wins in the case where it is possible to win the support win even in the high probability state may be the same as or different from that in the low probability state.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in this embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a first specific game state ST11, a second specific game state ST12, and a third specific game state ST13. In addition to this, as a game state, the first special result (
There are a first special game state (big hit game state) based on the big hit) and a second special game state (small hit game state) based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the first special result (jackpot) to be controlled by the game control device 100
is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game by being controlled by the production control device 300, the main start area that is the start area that should be mainly aimed in the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed The main variation special figure, which is the type of, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST14 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST11 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. And there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game. Also, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is the latent mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST14 because there is general power support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST14 and the third game state ST11 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the game state is the end of the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot),
It is done by deriving support hits and digesting the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13, and the special Of the probability variable jackpots to be in a high probability state after the end of the game state, when the probability variable A jackpot is obtained, the transition is made to the second specific game state ST12, and when the probability variable B jackpot is obtained, the shift is shifted to the first specific game state ST11. .

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and becomes a special game state, and there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (
When the game ball flows into the probability variable operation area) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), it shifts to the second specific game state ST12 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a probability variable B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and in the special game state V
In the case of passing (when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, the first
It shifts to a specific game state ST11. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST13. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 20
00 times), and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST11 reaches the ST number of times, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST14. Also good.
Also, the number of ST times (for example, 20
00 times), and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST12 reaches the ST number, the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game It is also possible to shift to state ST13).

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST13, the game shifts to a normal game state ST14. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the number of times the normal jackpot is supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Also, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST12, 10
It is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure variation display game is executed 00 times, and 1000 without deriving a big win in the second specific game state ST12.
When the special figure variation display game is executed twice, the game moves to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of support times for the probability variable A jackpot is set to "1000 times". In addition, the number of times of support for the variable probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be "until the next jackpot".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST13. That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived is the special It does not go through the game state.

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "20 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "20 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the third specific game state ST13 continues until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times.
, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the normal game state ST1
Go to 4. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST13, the third specific game state ST1 until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times.
3, and when the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the third specific game state ST13, the normal game state S
Move to T14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is "10
00 times”. Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, in the case of shifting to the chance mode via the special game state and the case of shifting to the chance mode without passing through the special game state, the effect executed during the chance mode (using the display device 41 etc. production by display, production by sound using speakers 19a, 19b, etc., production by light using frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc., production by movable members using board production device 44, frame production device, etc. , at least one of the variation pattern selection modes) can be made different. That is, the production mode of the production executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the big hit (normal jackpot, probability variable A jackpot), and the production mode executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the support hit (support hit A to C). Since the performance mode can be made different, depending on the performance mode of the performance executed during the chance mode, whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the big win or the one generated based on the derivation of the support hit. It can be suggested that

FIG. 9 shows an example of a variation pattern selection mode in the third specific game state ST13.
As shown in FIG. 9A, this embodiment has variation selection table groups A to D as variation selection table groups in which selectable variation patterns are defined. These variation selection table groups differ in the types of selectable variation patterns and selection ratios. As a result, the tendency of the execution mode of the special figure variation display game differs depending on the variation selection table group to be used.

The type of variation selection table group to be used can be changed when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the third specific game state ST13 reaches a specified number of times (here, 20 times, 100 times).
A variation pattern scenario that defines the process of changing the variation selection table group differs for each type of chance mode. That is, the derived results are normal jackpots, support hits A to C
The variation pattern scenario selected is made different depending on which one.

In the case of chance mode A, which is a chance mode corresponding to support hit A, from the 0th time to 2
A variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group A is selected for the 0th special figure variation display game.
In the case of chance mode B, which is a chance mode corresponding to support hit B, from the 0th time to 2
Using the variation selection table group A for the 0th special figure variation display game, from the 21st to 10
A variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group B is selected for the 0th special figure variation display game.

In the case of chance mode C, which is a chance mode corresponding to support hit C, 2 from the 0th time
Using the variation selection table group A for the 0th special figure variation display game, from the 21st to 10th
Using the variation selection table group B for the 0th special figure variation display game, 1 from the 101st time
A variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group C is selected for the 000th special figure variation display game.
In the case of chance mode D, which is a chance mode corresponding to a normal jackpot, 2 times from the 0th time
Using the variation selection table group A for the 0th special figure variation display game, from the 21st to 10th
A variation pattern scenario using the variation selection table group D is selected for the 0th special figure variation display game.

By doing so, even if the third specific game state ST13 is the same, the execution mode of the special figure variation display game will be different due to the different variation pattern scenarios, and the execution mode of the special figure variation display game will change. It is born and can improve the interest of the game. In particular, both the supporter win B and the normal jackpot are in the third specific game state ST13 over the period of executing the special figure variation display game 100 times. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The selection of the variation selection table group is not limited to those described above, and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, as shown in FIG. 9(b), any one of a plurality of types of chance modes corresponding to support hits A to C and normal jackpots may be selected.
This example includes variation pattern scenarios using variation selection tables specific to each of the support hits A to C and the normal jackpot, and it is possible to guess the type of chance mode from the variation pattern.
For example, since chance mode A2 uses unique variation selection table group D, it is possible to guess that it is chance mode A, and chance mode B2 uses unique variation selection table groups E and F, so chance mode It becomes possible to guess that it is B. again,
In chance mode C2, since unique variation selection table groups G and H are used, it is possible to guess that it is chance mode C. In chance mode D2, since unique variation selection table groups J and K are used, the chance mode can be inferred to be D,
By doing so, the game becomes more diverse, and the enjoyment of guessing the type of the chance mode can be given, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the timing at which the variation selection table group can be changed in the variation pattern scenario is
3rd specific game state ST1 as a break that may end the 3rd specific game state ST13
Although the 20th and 100th special figure variation display games are executed from the start of 3, the timing is not limited to this, and can be set at any timing.
Also, the change timing of the variation selection table group may be different for each chance mode.

In addition, instead of determining all the variable selection table groups to be used at the start of the chance mode, the variable selection table group to be used next can be selected from multiple types at the timing when the variable selection table group can be changed. Also good.
Also, instead of a predetermined timing, a lottery for changing the variation selection table group may be performed each time the special figure variation display game is executed, and the change may be made when the lottery is won.
Also, although the third specific game state ST13 has been described in FIG. 9, it is possible to sequentially change the variation selection table group similarly in other game states.

In this embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electricity support),
That is, when the support win is derived in the third specific game state ST13, the support count is reset and the support count corresponding to the new support win is set again.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(a), in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit is reached in the 10th rotation. If A is derived, the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 to 20.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10(b), in the third specific game state ST13 shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit A is reached at the 90th rotation.
is derived, the number of remaining supports is changed from 10 to 20.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the production mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10(a), when the number of remaining supports is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the production mode changes from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to support win B) to chance mode. It switches to A (chance mode corresponding to support hit A). Also, for example, in the example shown in FIG.
When changing to 0 times, the performance mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode A. Along with this, the variation pattern scenario is also switched, and the variation selection table group is reset according to the switched variation pattern scenario.

Incidentally, when a new support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the derived support hit may be set.
For example, it is possible to set a specific variation pattern scenario different from the variation pattern scenario that can be selected when a support win is derived in the normal game state ST14. In this specific variation pattern scenario, a variation pattern scenario is set to select a specific variation selection table group different from the variation selection table group that can be selected when a support win is derived in the normal game state ST14. Also good. By doing so, when the support hit is derived for the first time in one continuous third specific game state ST13, the variation selection table group is changed, but after that, when the support hit is derived, the variation The selection table group is maintained, and it is possible to give the impression that the continuous third specific game state ST13 is one by deriving the support hits a plurality of times.

Moreover, it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 10, chance mode B may be continued even after the number of remaining support times is changed to 20 times.
Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the supporter hit C). , As shown in FIG. 10, if the supporter hit derived after the supporter hit B is the supporter hit A, switching the production mode from the chance mode B to the chance mode A results in a rank down, so the number of remaining supports. The chance mode B may be continued (or switched to a chance mode different from the chance mode A or the chance mode B) even after is changed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. If the support hit A is derived at , the remaining number of support is changed from 90 times to 110 times (=90
times + 20 times), for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. When the support hit A is derived at the 90th rotation, the number of remaining supports may be changed from 10 times to 30 times (=10 times+20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of times of support, and if the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of times of support is You may make it change to the said upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 11(a), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode,
Chance mode B may be continued even after the remaining support count is changed. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. If the support hit A is derived in
The number of support times corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, and the remaining number of support times (90 times)
Since it is less than, while not changing the remaining number of support, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG.
In the specific game state ST13, when the support hit A is derived at the 90th turn, the support count corresponding to the new support hit is 20 times, which is greater than the remaining support count (10 times). may be changed from 10 times to 20 times.

In this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. That is, for example, in the example shown in the right diagram of FIG. 11(b), when the remaining support count is changed, the production mode may be switched from chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining support count may be changed. Chance mode B may be continued even after is changed. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, the effects performed during execution of the support winning game (the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support winning") are special effects such as battle effects (described later).
In addition, the number of remaining support and the number of support corresponding to the new support hit, whichever is greater (
In a gaming machine 10 (that is, a gaming machine 10 that performs the control shown in FIG. 11(b)), a support winning game in which the number of times of support is employed (for example, the ) in which the result in the right figure is “support hit A”), a special effect is performed only during execution, and a support hit game in which the number of support times is not adopted (for example, FIG. 11 (b
) in which the result in the left figure is "support win A"), the special effect may not be performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game).
The support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is a variation pattern that takes into account the execution of a special effect during the support hit game, so the special effect is executed during the support hit game. If not, it is preferable to make adjustments such as making the temporary stop display time of the game result longer than in the case of executing the special effect.

In the example shown in the left diagram of FIG. 11(b), as a result of the support win game in which the number of support is not adopted, the support win symbol (here, the support win A symbol) is stopped and displayed. Not limited. For example, as a result of a win-win-support game in which the number of times of support is not adopted, instead of win-win-support symbols, losing symbols may be stopped and displayed. In the game machine 10 configured to adopt the larger one (which is advantageous for the player) of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support hit, the effect control device 300 is the game control device 100.
Based on the command transmitted from, it is determined whether or not the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit. Specifically, the production control device 300
is, for example, the support number based on the decoration special figure command for notifying the stop symbol on the display device 41, and the support number based on the time shortening variation number command for notifying the time shortening variation number (support number). In comparison, if different, it is determined that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit. Then, when it is determined that the game control device 100 determines not to adopt the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit, as a result of the support hit game, the pattern specified by the decoration special figure command (the new support hit In place of the support hit symbol corresponding to ), the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the support hit derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support) is the support hit A, but it is not limited to this. That is, the support win A may be derived during the chance mode, the support win B may be derived during the chance mode, and the support win C may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the support hit variation pattern selected when the result is "support hit" is the SP reach of the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss" is the same as the fluctuation pattern that occurs. That is, SP reach occurs in the support winning game. In addition, in the present embodiment, if the result is a special figure variation display game other than "support hit", and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, the special figure Special effects such as battle effects (to be described later) can be executed even during execution of the figure-variable display game.
In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executable even during execution of a special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be dedicated to the support winning game, and may not be executed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "big hit" or "lost". .

In addition, the support hit variation pattern may be the same as the variation pattern in which the SP reach does not occur among the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "loss",
It may be a variation pattern dedicated to the support winning game.
For example, if you are not in the chance mode, you can select a variation pattern dedicated to the support game, and if you are in the chance mode, you can use a variation pattern that is combined with a special figure variation display game other than the support game (for example, the result is By selecting a variation pattern that causes SP reach among the variation patterns selected in the case of "jackpot" or "losing", the dedicated variation pattern has a longer variation time than the shared variation pattern. may be set as a variation pattern. As a result, the variation time of the support winning game that is executed when the chance mode is not on is longer than the variation time of the support winning game that is performed when the chance mode is on. During the fluctuation time of the support winning game, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection and effect explanation related to the chance mode (third specific game state ST13), and the effect (fanfare effect) executed at the start of the chance mode etc.).

Alternatively, the stop display time of the support winning game may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the support winning game. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute mode selection and production explanations related to the chance mode during the stop display time of the support game, so the production (fanfare production, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode You can have a connection with

Alternatively, a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time may be selected as the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode. Specifically, for example,
When the result of the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is "loss", the variation pattern selected when the result is "loss" as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game. A variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, or a variation pattern dedicated to the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode may be selected. As a result, when the chance mode is started, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection, effect explanation, etc. related to the chance mode. In addition, this makes it possible to accumulate the second starting memory before the game is switched to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it becomes the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second start memory by, the main variation (
It is possible to execute the special figure 2 variable display game), and the game can be advanced so as to be advantageous to the player.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the game control device 10
0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X
4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the top 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 acting as main control means
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) to start normally according to the instructions from 00
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired,
Access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A has a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that triggers random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg, 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
(step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. In other words, if the gaming machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). Thereafter, ON data of the security signal is output and OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, return to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1
The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by means of voice output from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, step X29,
After executing the process of X30, the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting change flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N)
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43
In ;Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command during probability setting confirmation is produced by the production control board (production control device 300)
(step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
It notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, at least 5
Since it is necessary to output the security signal during 0 ms, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34).
N), the process returns to step X33, and when a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 12 and 13) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. Processing for enabling interrupts (step X32
) and before the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122
) is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command,
The notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set is the area to be initialized (for example, the blackout inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in a checksum area and an area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, 0 clear the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area). Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. Note that in step X44,
The stack area and unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
. The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
A support frequency information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game with the performance frequency information command and the general electric support, is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the general pattern (hit random number)) initial value (start value) in a predetermined area of RWM (step X48), and then enable interrupts (step X48).
49). Since the random number generating circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the special symbol random number, and the winning random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in the random number generating circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special pattern random number and the hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. Periodic CTC output (
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing. In addition, in the special pattern random number and the hit random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, there is no random number (hitting pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, so there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process of step X50, the process of prohibiting interrupts (step X51)
to perform performance display editing processing (step X52). Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process (Step X5
0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number updating process in step X50 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122)
to terminate the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as c) is performed. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step X107),
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the special figure variation display game, the normal figure game processing (step X112) for performing the processing relating to the normal figure variation display game X114) is performed, and the segment LED editing process (step X115) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display the desired content is performed. conduct.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring processing (step X118) for checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and determining whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above will be described. In the special game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
Monitoring of the input of 7a, control of the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the special game process, first, a start switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start 1 switch 36a and the start 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening
7. When there is a prize for a game ball, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the prize. make a judgment.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls is monitored by the upper big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38, and the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 Big prize mouth switch 39a
Performs processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in. Then, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special game processing timer is "
0" (step A5; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. (step A6), and acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A
10).

At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of big win and the big prize winning opening of each big win. Special figure display process (step A11
)I do.

At step A8, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate, etc. are performed. A fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set, and a large winning opening remains. A process (step A13) during the opening of the big winning opening for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.

At step A8, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. Large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing
I do.
At step A8, if the special figure game process number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal process is performed.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Processing (step A16) during a small hit fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A8, if the special game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A19) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A
20), symbol variation control processing (step A21) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display device 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A22), the symbol variation control process (step A23) relating to the control of the special symbol variation by the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed. . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, It is determined whether or not there is a prize to the 1 start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning to the first starting port (step A103
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first starting port (step A
103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a prize is not won unless the first starting port (starting prize port 36) is hit to the left, and a prize is not won to the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 unless the ball is hit to the right. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting port (starting winning port 36) (step A107), special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A1
09), a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second start opening (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second starting port (step A111
At ;N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the second starting port (step A
111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which game balls can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y). , the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
At 112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

At step A113, when it is determined that the general electric fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the second start port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), special Performing the figure start port switch common processing (step A115),
Terminate the starting port switch monitoring process. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 17 shows hardware random number acquisition processing (step A1
02, A110).
In this hardware random number acquisition process, first, out of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning opening 37), the no winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set ( Step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a (step A122).
If there is no input to the starter switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
, determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if the random number has not been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.
If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y)
loads the extracted jackpot random number into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepares (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37), set the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A
126), ending the hard random number acquisition process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
a and starter 2 switch 37a, load the starter signal output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starter switch to be monitored is output to the management device outside the game machine 10 (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of times of output overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal output count area (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the update target special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6), save the target start-up winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hardware random number acquisition process is stored as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (step A1
40), save in the RWM special symbol random number storage area (step A141).
Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, to prepare a decorative special figure pending number command corresponding to the starting opening switch and special figure pending number to be monitored (step A147), effect command setting processing (step A148) is performed,
End the special figure starting mouth switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of a game ball in the starting area of the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and starts the variable display game execution right. It constitutes a starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random values stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37),
A predetermined number is stored as the second start memory up to the upper limit.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14
6) will be described in detail. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 19, first, a big-hit determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a special figure symbol random number check table for big hit corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and a step of special figure starter switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for a small hit is set (step A161), and prepared at step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the judgment result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets lost stop symbol information (step A167), and proceeds to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special figure symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared at step A140 of the special figure start opening switch common processing The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process proceeds to step A168.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A171).
After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A172), and perform the production command setting process. (Step A173), end the special figure reservation information determination process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead object and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. and transmitted to the effect control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (
For example, it determines whether or not there will be a special result). The timing for determining the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" (step A305). And the number of special figures 1 pending is "0" (step A3
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A309; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316
), to end the special figure normal processing. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 outputs the customer waiting demo command forming the waiting information.
It will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) skips steps A310 to A312 and proceeds to step A313.

Also, in step A301, if the number of special figures 2 pending is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (
Step A304) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.
Also, in step A305, if the special figure 1 pending number is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (
Step A308) is performed and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is preferentially executed over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 21(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A32
1) Set the deviation information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit, and also set whether the first special figure variation display game is a small hit or not. Big hit flag 1 to set deviation information and small hit information in the small hit flag for determining whether
Setting processing (step A322) is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 is set (step A33
3). Then, the initial value ("0" in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure usual processing will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the target.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A341).
, set deviation information and big win information in a big win flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big win, and determine whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small win. Big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and small hit information to the small hit flag for determination is performed.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A
343) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various settings related to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348)
, save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 5
2 flashing period timer) is set to an initial value (here, 100 ms) (step A35
3). Then, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In FIG. 22(a), the jackpot flag 1 setting process (
Step A322) is shown.
In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, jackpot flag 1 area, small hit flag 1 area,
The deviation information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step A362), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step A36
3). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 1).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A364) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the acquired big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is a big hit (step A365; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366 ), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N),
A small hit determination process (step A367) for determining whether or not the small hit is made according to whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is performed.

Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361 and saved. Then (step A369), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A370).

If it is in a high probability state (step A370; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A3
70;N) performs a support hit determination process (step A371) for determining whether or not the support hit is determined according to whether or not the acquired big hit random value matches the support hit determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is a support hit (step A372; Y), the support hit flag 1 area in which the loss information was saved in step A361 is overwritten with the support hit information and saved. Then (step A373), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A371) is not a support hit (step A372; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In FIG. 22(b), the jackpot flag 2 setting process (
Step A342) is shown.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area,
The deviation information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area (step A381). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepare it (step A382), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0 ( Step A38
3). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

After that, a big-hit determination process (step A384) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the obtained big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A384) is a big hit (step A385; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information was saved in step A381 (step A386 ), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step A384) is not a big hit (step A385; N),
A small hit determination process (step A387) for determining whether or not the small hit is made according to whether or not the obtained big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A389), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A390).

If it is in a high probability state (step A390; Y), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit flag 2 area. On the other hand, if it is not in a high probability state (step A3
90; N) performs a support hit determination process (step A391) for determining whether or not the support hit is determined according to whether the acquired big hit random value matches the support hit determination value.

Then, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is a support hit (step A392; Y), the support hit information is overwritten in the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 and saved. Then (step A393), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A391) is not a support hit (step A392; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23(a) shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this big hit determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit decision value table is provided for each set probability value, and defines an upper limit decision value in a high probability state and an upper limit decision value in a low probability state (normal probability state). Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A402), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or probability state (high probability state or normal probability state),
The lower limit judgment value may be changed according to the set probability value or probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. to set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A403
;N) determines whether it is in a high probability state (step A404). Then, if the high probability state (step A404; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A40
5), determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407)
. Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A404; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A406), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407) . The upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step A408), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A407
; N), that is, if it is a big hit, set a big hit as the judgment result (step A40
9), end the big hit determination process.

[Small hit determination process]
FIG. 23(b) shows the small hit determination process (steps A367 and A387) in the above-described big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The range of the big-hit determination value and the range of the small-hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412
). When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y)
, that is, if it is not a small hit, set the deviation as the determination result (step A414),
Finish the small hit determination process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step A414), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set a small hit as the judgment result (step A415), and end the small hit judgment process. do.

[Support hit determination process]
FIG. 24 shows support hit determination processing (steps A371 and A391) in the above-described jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this support hit determination process, first,
A support hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the set probability value is set (step A421). The per support upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, setting 1 is the most likely to win, and setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is changed for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁
Further, the range of the big hit determination value, the range of the small hit determination value and the range of the support hit determination value for the same probability set value are arranged so as not to overlap each other. The ranges of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value and the support hit determination value for different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap each other.

It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the support hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a support hit. By setting the support hit upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit determination is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value for the support hit is the same value regardless of the probability set value, but the lower limit judgment value for the support hit may be changed according to the probability set value. In this case, similarly to the upper limit judgment value for support hits, a lower limit judgment value for support hits is selected according to the probability set value, in which the lower limit judgment value for support hits is defined for each probability set value. Of course, the support hit upper limit determination value table and the support hit lower limit determination value table may be combined into a support hit determination value table.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support per lower limit judgment value (step A423; Y)
, that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A428)
, end the support hit determination process. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the support hit was lost. Also, if the target jackpot random number value is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (step A423; N), it is determined whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427). The support hit upper limit judgment value set here is obtained by referring to the support hit upper limit judgment value table set in step A421 described above.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support per upper limit judgment value (step A427; Y)
, that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A428)
, ends the jackpot determination process. Also, if the value of the target jackpot random number is not greater than the support upper limit judgment value (step A427; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process exit.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 25 shows the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A432). Next, special figure 1
A jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in a special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44
0; Y) loads the special figure random number from the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A441). Next, a special figure 1 small hit pattern table is set (step A442)
, The stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A443). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop design pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decoration special figure command (step A
455).

Also, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44
6; Y) loads the special figure random number from the special figure 1 special figure random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure 1 support (step A448
), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A449). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A451), save the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A452), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A455).
Also, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (step A453), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A454), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing,
A stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A456),
Effect command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special design 1 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop design setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 26 shows the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (reservation number 1) to load the special symbol random number (step A472). Next, special figure 2
A big hit design table is set (step A473), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded special design random number is obtained and saved in the special design 2 stop design number area (step A474). A jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A475), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A476). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A477), time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is obtained, and time reduction determination data is obtained. It saves in the area (step A478), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A479). These information are for setting the variation pattern scenario which is the information regarding the execution mode of the special game state, the effect mode after the end of the special game state, and the transition of the variation selection table group after the end of the special game state. . Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48
0; Y) loads the special figure random number from the special figure 2 special figure random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A481). Next, a special figure 2 small hit pattern table is set (step A482)
, The stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A483). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is obtained and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop design pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decoration special figure command (step A
495).

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A48
6; Y) loads the special symbol random number from the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A487). Next, a special figure 2 support per symbol table is set (step A488
), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded special figure random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A489). This process selects the type of support hit.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( Step A491), save the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A492), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern (step A495).
Also, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop design number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A493), and the stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area. (step A494), and prepares a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing,
A stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A496),
Effect command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the design data corresponding to the stop design number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special design 2 special design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop design setting process is terminated.
When setting the stop pattern for each result in this way, by using a common special pattern random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. can reduce the burden of control.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 27 shows the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A324, A344) in the special figure reservation information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
First, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A461), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the game state, the number of reservations, the stop symbol pattern number, the remaining support count, and the currently set variation selection table group is acquired. (step A462).
Then, save the acquired variable group selection pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A465), and end the special figure information setting process.

Variation pattern selection processing (steps A171, A3
26, A346), a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table selected based on the variation group selection pointer acquired here.
That is, the variation pattern is selected based on the game state, the number of suspensions, the stop symbol pattern number, the number of remaining supports, and the currently set variation selection table group. By selecting a variation pattern in consideration of such factors, it is possible to execute various effects.

For example, the variation selection table group selected according to the variation pattern scenario shown in FIG. is included, and a variation pattern table corresponding to the result is selected from the currently set variation selection table group.
As a result, different variation patterns can be selected for each of big wins, small wins, support wins and losses. For example, the variation pattern table for per support includes only variation patterns including the reach state. Variation patterns for executing the same ready-to-win effect may also be included in the variation pattern table selected in the case of a big win, a small win and a loss, but the result is determined in each case of a big win, a small win, a support hit and a loss. The fluctuation time values are made different in order to make the derivation actions different, and the fluctuation patterns of the respective fluctuation pattern tables are different fluctuation patterns.

Also, even in the same gaming state, it is possible to select different variation patterns depending on the set variation selection table group.
For example, in the chance mode B and the chance mode D shown in FIG. 9(a), both are in the third specific game state ST13 where the number of times of support is 100, but the variation selection table group from the 20th time to the 100th time is different. It is possible to make different tendencies of the respective selected variation patterns and to execute different presentations.

Also, even if the number of times of support is the same 100 times, it is possible to change the performance mode by making the variation pattern different depending on the set variation selection table group. For example, depending on the variation selection table group, whether or not to select the variation pattern including the time value for executing the effect to notify the number of support is made different, and whether or not to notify the number of support is selected according to the set variation selection table group. can be made

In addition, in the case of the third specific game state ST13, it is also possible to select a variation pattern considering the number of remaining support times. For example, in the final game in the third specific game state ST13, a variation pattern including a time value is selected for displaying a result image that notifies the result of the game in the third specific game state ST13. However, the variation pattern is selected considering the result of the final game, and if the result is wrong, the variation pattern including the time value for displaying the result image is selected, but the result is Since no result image is displayed in the case of a big win, a small win or a support win, a variation pattern that does not include a time value for displaying a result image is selected.
Also, it is possible to select a specific variation pattern at any time, such as when the third specific game state ST13 starts, or when a predetermined number of times is reached, or a predetermined number of times before the end.

In addition, by enabling the selection of the variation pattern in consideration of the game state, for example, it is possible to select different variation patterns depending on whether the support hit occurs in the normal game state ST14 or in the third specific game state ST13. Become.
As a result, the support hit is derived in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state S
When T13 starts, a variation pattern including a time value for executing a performance peculiar to the start is selected, and when a support hit is derived in the third specific game state ST13 and the number of times of support is reset. , it is possible to select a variation pattern including a time value for executing an effect peculiar to resetting.

In this way, by allowing the game control device 100 to select a variation pattern in consideration of various factors, it is possible to vary the variation time according to the situation and execute various effects. Although the performance control device 300 can also select the performance, it is necessary to follow the variable time selected by the game control device 100 for the variable time, and it is difficult to secure the time specific to the performance to be executed as described above. is.

From the above, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. game control means (game control device 100) and a normal fluctuation winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means has a normal game state and a normal fluctuation rather than the normal game state. It is possible to generate a special game state and a special game state in which winning to the prize winning device 37 is easy. It is possible to generate a specific game state, and if the result of the game is a specific result different from the special result, the specific game state can be generated without generating the special game state, and the game result is a special game state. A first lottery random number (jackpot random number) is used to determine which of the result, the specific result, and the losing result, and before the game is executed, the result of the game is divided into the special result and the specific result. , or the deviation result.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

The special results include a first special result (big win) with the operation of the condition device and a second special result (minor win) without the operation of the condition device. One of the first special result, the second special result, the specified result, and the lost result is determined by one first lottery random number.
Therefore, the lottery can be performed using one first lottery random number, the control of the lottery can be simplified, and the burden of control can be reduced.

Further, the first special result, the second special result, and the specific result each include a plurality of types of results, and the game control means determines that the lottery result by the first lottery random number is the first special result, the second special result, or the specific result. When it is a result, the type of the first special result, the second special result or the specific result will be determined using one second lottery random number (special symbol random number).
Therefore, by using a common second lottery random number even if the results are different, the lottery control can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, the game control means includes a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is an execution mode of the game, and a variation pattern scenario in which information about transition of the variation pattern table in the specific game state is defined. A variation pattern table defined in a variation pattern scenario is set on the basis of satisfying a predetermined condition in a state, and when a specific result is derived, a variation pattern to be used in a specific game state based on the specific result A scenario is selected based on the type of the specific result selected by the second lottery random number.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state with the second lottery random number, simplify the lottery control, and reduce the control load.
In addition, it becomes possible to select from among a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, a game control for controlling a game in a game machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. Means and a normal variable prize winning device 3 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball
7, the game control means can generate a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state, and a plurality of types of game results can be obtained. If any of the specific results consisting of, it is possible to generate a specific game state,
A variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode, and a variation pattern scenario in which information about transition of the variation pattern table in a specific game state is defined, and when a specific result is derived, A variation pattern scenario to be used in the specific game state based on the specific result is selected based on the type of the specific result.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select from a plurality of patterns for the transition of the variation pattern in the specific game state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 28 shows the special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure fluctuation processing, first, a design stop command corresponding to the fluctuation design determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of this embodiment, the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop symbol pattern is the losing symbol pattern, and the display time is set to 600 milliseconds when the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern.
Seconds are set, and when the stop symbol pattern is a small winning symbol pattern, the display time is 60.
0 ms is set, and 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the winning symbol pattern. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, set "2" for special figure display processing as the processing number (step A605)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A606). moreover,
A signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 variation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and a signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 (for example, during the special symbol 2 variation signal OFF) in the test signal output data area (Step A
608), save the initial value of the control timer (for example, 256 ms) in the control timer area of the number of symbol fixed times signal related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (step A)
609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51 in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 52, save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the supporter hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the supporter hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of the RWM are cleared (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of RWM. And clear the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), a jackpot in the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 jackpot)
(for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710 ), and set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708). Test signals (for example, condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operation device operating signal ON, special symbol 1 winning signal ON) regarding the start of the figure fluctuation display game jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) are set to RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (Step A
709), and sets the round number upper limit table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of this embodiment, "1
0", "7" or "2") and saves it in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A712). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, load the decoration special figure command from the decoration special figure command area of RWM, prepare (step A714), and perform the production command setting process (step A715). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A716), and effect command setting processing (Step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is 0 when the jackpot with a ball to be played (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden hit, etc.).
), it is ON at the time of the jackpot in the time-saving state, and is OFF otherwise.
In addition, the big win 3 signal is ON when the big win is a big win with balls, and is OFF when the big win is a big win with no balls.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A723). This stores the information of the probability state of the special figure and the time saving state when the special result occurs. Then, based on the information stored later, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined.

Then, clear the area for the number of fraudulent winning prizes corresponding to the opening information for the big winning prize (
Step A724), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the area of the flag for the fraud monitoring period of the big winning opening corresponding to the opening information for the big winning opening (step A725). Thereafter, a fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 determines the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 38 based on whether the result is a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 to the open state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and if it is a small hit (step A727; Y), A test signal (for example, a special symbol 2 small hit signal is ON) relating to the start of the second special figure variation display game small hit (special 2 small hit) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A730). , the time reduction variation number update process is performed (step A731
).
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). saves a test signal (for example, turning on a special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the first special figure variation display game small hit (special figure 1 small hit) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A729), time reduction fluctuation number update processing is performed (step A731
).

Next, production mode information check processing for setting production mode (step A732)
to determine whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
733).
If the special figure is not in the high probability (step A733; N), the decoration special figure command is loaded from the decoration special figure command area, prepared (step A734), and the production command setting process (
Step A735) is performed. Next, a small winning fanfare command is prepared (step A736), effect command setting processing (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small winning fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Moreover, when it is in the high probability of a special figure (step A733; Y), it transfers to the process of step A738. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability state, the occurrence of a small win opens the big winning opening, but the occurrence of a small win is not allowed in the game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag saving area (step A738), and the small winning fanfare medium processing transition setting process (step A738) for shifting to the small winning fanfare medium processing A739) is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). If it is a support hit (
Step A740; Y) performs support operation setting processing (step A742), performs special figure normal processing transition setting processing (step A743) for transitioning to special figure normal processing, and ends processing during special figure display .
If the support hit flag 2 is not support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is support hit (step A741). If it is per support (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure End the display process.

Moreover, when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), time shortening fluctuation frequency update processing (step A744) is performed. Then, an effect mode information check process (step A745) relating to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation number for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation number for effect and the remaining rotation number for switching preparation are set. matches (step A747). In addition, the switching preparation remaining number of rotations may be a different value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes, or may be the same value in any one of the plurality of presentation modes. (number of rotations), or may be the same value (number of rotations) in all of the plurality of presentation modes.
When the production remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed, and the special figure display Terminate intermediate processing.

On the other hand, if the number of rotations remaining for effect and the number of rotations remaining for switching preparation match (step A747; Y
) prepares the production mode switching preparation command (step A748), performs production command setting processing (step A749), performs special figure normal processing transition setting processing (step A750) for shifting to special figure normal processing , To end the special figure display process. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for not performing a look-ahead production from several rotations before the production mode switches, and by transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, the production is performed across the modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction, etc. from occurring in

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
In FIG. 31, time reduction variation number update processing (step A73
1, A744). In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the general electric power is being supported (step A751). And if it is not in the public electricity support (step A
751;N) terminates the time reduction variation count update process. Also, if the general electricity support is in progress (step A751; Y), update the time reduction fluctuation count by -1 (step A752)
, it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A753).

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. Further, when the number of times of time reduction fluctuation becomes "0" (step A75
In 3; Y), a signal relating to the time-saving end (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF
F, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, save the no time saving number in the game state display number area (step A756), and save the normal low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (step A75
7), save the special figure low probability & time saving no flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A758). Then, turn off the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and the display LED (
For example, in order to turn off the first game state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

[Production mode information check process]
In FIG. 32, production mode information check processing (step A7
32, A745). In this effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. .

Also, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special figure variation display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , determines whether the number of rotations remaining for the effect has become "0" (step A
773). If the number of rotations remaining for effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when changing the effect mode from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the production remaining rotation number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired,
It saves in the effect remaining rotation speed area in RWM (step A777), acquires the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode transition information area in RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set production mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A782), Command setting processing (step A782) is performed.
Next, prepare a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number (
Step A783), effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A787)
If it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the presentation mode information check process is terminated. In addition, if the left-handed mode is set (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), and effect command setting processing (step A7
89) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is terminated. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that gives notice of the switching from before the specified number of revolutions before switching the effect mode. By managing the performance mode by the game control device 100 in this way, control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific performance mode, for example, can be performed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the transition of the variation selection table group according to the variation pattern scenario described above may also be controlled by this effect mode information check process, or may be controlled by another equivalent process.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 33 shows fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display processing. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is entered.
is set (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step A792).

Next, a signal relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turning on the big win 1 signal (output with the big win + small win), turning on the big win 4 signal (output with the big win)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Turn off the variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, turn off the normal design 1 variable time shortening state signal, turn off the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A79).
6), save the general pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the game state display LED (for example, the third game state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state is extinguished. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), special figure fluctuation display that can be executed in the time saving state A time-reduction variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state end, and the normal probability state and normal state occur.

After that, save the number of the production mode 1 in the production mode number area (step A803),
The effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal (for example, turning on the firing position designation signal 1) relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806).
), in order to light up the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display section 56a), the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/interval Processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
In FIG. 34, the processing transition setting processing during the small hit fanfare in the above-mentioned special figure display processing (
Step A739) is shown. In this small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process, first,
Set "7" for processing during the small hit fanfare as the processing number (step A81
1) Save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A812).
Next, a small win fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal regarding the start of a small win (for example, a big win 1 signal is set to O
N (output with big hit + small hit)) is saved in the external information output data area (step A81
4).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A816).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the number in the right hitting state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the process transition setting process during small win fanfare is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-described special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction variation frequency area (step A821), and the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is external information Save in the output data area (step A822). That is, when the support winning pattern stops, only a signal relating to the start of the time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is output as the external information signal.
Then, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON,
Special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal ON, normal design 1 high probability state signal ON, normal design 1
The variable time shortening state signal is ON, and the normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A824), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general figure gate mode flag area (step A82
5), in order to maintain the probability state flag and make it a time saving, synthesize a special figure time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the display LED during right-handed (for example, the first game state display section 56a) is turned on. In order to light it up, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of variation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting (step A904) in the jackpot end processing is performed. By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the presentation mode transition information, the variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group, is also acquired.
That is, in the case of a support hit, a stop pattern, which is a type of support hit, is selected by a special symbol random number, and production mode transition information is selected based on the stop design to select a variation pattern scenario. Become.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that has become a support hit is acquired. , save in the effect mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that has become a support hit, the production remaining rotation number of the production mode that is set is acquired, and is saved in the production remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that has become a support hit. Next mode transition information of the effect mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the performance mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the execution of the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that became a support hit. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the transmission command area at power failure restoration (step A835), and the effect command setting process (step A836) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, “high probability/
There are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in either "with time saving" or "with low probability / with time saving". Although it is not used in this process, there are a number of other commands that include "high probability, no time saving", "low probability, no time saving", and further production mode information.
Next, prepare a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number (
Step A837), performance command setting processing (step A838) is performed, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A839), and performance command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is terminated.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
In FIG. 36, special figure normal processing transition setting processing (step A74
3, A750). In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" for special figure normal processing is set as a processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852). .
Then, the information in the fluctuating pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process is completed. .

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 37 shows the jackpot ending process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end processing, first, the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time is set when the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data (step A901).
If it is not high probability data (step A901; N), perform jackpot end setting processing 1 (
Step A902), when it is high probability data (step A901; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A903). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of start of fluctuation (at the time of setting the stop symbol) is obtained (step A905). The presentation mode transition information also includes a variation pattern scenario that is information regarding the transition of the variation selection table group.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for management of the production mode and management of the variable selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired. is saved in the effect mode number area (step A906). Furthermore, the production remaining rotation speed of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the production mode set after the special game state is shifted to the next mode. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908).
). Based on the information saved here, the effect mode and the variation selection table group are shifted based on the special figure variation display game being executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A909),
The command is saved in the transmission command area for restoration from power failure (step A910), and effect command setting processing (step A911) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, “high probability/
There are a plurality of commands in which the information of the production mode is further included in any of "with time saving", "high probability/no time saving", and "low probability/with time saving". Although not used in this process, there are several other commands that include information on the production mode in addition to "low probability / no time saving".
Next, prepare a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number (
Step A912), effect command setting processing (step A913) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count is prepared (step A914), and effect command setting processing (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number relating to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, the signals related to the end of the big win (for example, the big win 1 signal is OFF, the big win 3 signal is OFF, and the big win 4 signal is OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9
18) Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the conditional device operating signal, turn off the continuous action device operating signal, turn off the special symbol 1 winning signal, turn off the special symbol 2 winning signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A921), and the information in the presentation mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end processing is completed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
In FIG. 38(a), the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A9
02). In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931).
Since the signal relating to the start of time saving is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving (for example, special pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal design 1
The high-probability state signal is ON, the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A933), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general game mode flag area (step A93
4), save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A935). After that, the initial value of the shortened variation frequency (for example, 100) is entered in the shortened variation frequency area.
) is saved (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. In addition, by setting the initial value (eg 100) in the time saving variation frequency region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (eg 100 times).

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
In FIG. 38(b), the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A9
03) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of a high probability (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941).
). Since the signal regarding the start of the high probability is output from the middle of the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal about the start of high probability & short time (for example,
Special pattern 1 high probability state signal ON, special pattern 2 high probability state signal ON, special pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal ON, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A943), save the high probability & time saving flag in the general game mode flag area (step A944)
, Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A
945). After that, the time shortening variation count area is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the time saving state until derivation of the next special result mode. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the right-handed hit is not set in the big hit end setting process 2.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100, over a predetermined period of time, the specific game state (time saving state) to extend the period of opening the normal variable winning device 37
can generate a specific game state generation control means.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 39 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
Effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from the rising edge) is performed. Inputs from the production button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this production button input processing, when there is an input from the production button 25 and the cross key 29, processing for changing the contents of production is performed. .

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the sound output from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18 including the display plate 350, etc. is performed. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, board effect setting processing (step C20) for controlling effect is performed, and WDT is cleared. It returns to the processing (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 40 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) during the big hit, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Further, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot command such as a pending number command or an error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on And the look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead design system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead performance, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 . , then stop and display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
In the standby memory display unit 83, a decoration feature corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory or second starting memory) that is the right to execute one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is displayed. A graphical start-up memory display is displayed. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds one-to-one with the starting memory that is the execution right of the one game, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of storage so that it becomes a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested. In addition, in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starting memory (second
You may make it display both decoration special-figure starting memory display corresponding to starting memory), and.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prefetch such as the variation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display portion 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided.

FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 show a case of executing a special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit". FIG. 42 is an example of display on the display device 41, and FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS.
The game result is stopped and displayed on the decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 ) disappears. In FIG. 42(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 4 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state.

Also, in FIG. 42(a), the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 8
At 3, a pending change effect suggesting a look-ahead result is executed. Here, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "support hit A", and that effect , It is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support given is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "346".
Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 4, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. At the same time that the display of shifting the display to the in-execution memory display section 84) is executed, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Here, since a plurality of decoration special figure start memory display is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is changed to the running memory display by the transition effect. While moving to the part 84, the decoration special figure starting memory display other than the left end of the standby memory display part 83 is shifted to the left in the memory display part 83 during standby.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. The fluctuation display of starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", as shown in FIGS.
The same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and the reach fluctuation starts (t64).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42(d) and 43, on the display device 41, a battle effect is started in which the friendly character fights the enemy character (t65). At the start of the battle production,
In order to secure a battle effect display portion for displaying a battle effect within the display area of the display device 41, the left movement display area of the first decoration game display portion 81 is moved to the left end of the display area of the display device 41. , the right fluctuating display area of the first decoration game display portion 81 moves to the right end of the display area of the display device 41, and the visibility of the middle fluctuating display area is lowered and becomes invisible. That is, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area is lowered by the specific effect display. Further, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the result of the battle effect is announced. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle presentation is "tie". On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "big win", the result of the battle presentation is "winning of the ally character", and the result of the special figure variation display game being performed is "loss". , the result of the battle effect is "losing of the ally character".

Next, as shown in FIG. 42(f), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display section 81. FIG. As a result, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area is restored. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66),
As shown in FIGS. 42(g) and 43, in the display device 41, when the variable display ends, the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, The decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Here, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". It is "434".

Also, as shown in FIGS. 42(g) and 43, when the stop display time starts (t66),
When the support number notification effect starts, first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of support times corresponding to "support win A" is 20.
Since the number of times of support given this time is 20 times, an effect (for example, an effect of displaying "20 times of support" on the support time display unit 86) is executed. In contrast,
If the game result is "support win B", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. be. Further, when the game result is "support win C", the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42(g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the waiting memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 3, and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t67). When the variable time starts (t67), as shown in FIG. 43, the game shifts to the chance mode. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67), the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Further, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win" is over (t67).
, to the second specific game state ST12.

In this embodiment, the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation configured not to display. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the chance mode (t67), the main variation switches from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game, so as shown in FIGS. The decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 disappears.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, that is, when it is not during the chance mode (during general electric support), the standby storage display section 83
And it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory in the in-execution memory display unit 84, but the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. In addition, when the game state is the second specific game state ST12 or the third specific game state ST13, that is, when the chance mode is in progress (during general electric support), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit during execution Although it is possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory in 84, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 42(h), the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 85a on the display device 41 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 42(i) and 43, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The fluctuation display of starts.
When the variable display starts (t68), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. 42 (
As shown in i), an effect for notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the number of times of support display 86) is executed.

Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect is executed to notify that the game will enter the chance mode, and then an effect is executed to notify that the chance mode is in progress. During the chance mode (during general electric support), the battle effect started during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit" is continued, that is, the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit" Since the game ends in a draw and the battle continues without a settlement, in FIGS. 42(i) and (j), as an effect to notify that the chance mode is on, a effect to display "battle mode" is displayed. It is running. As a result, it is possible to connect the effects before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Also, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 43, a right-handed instruction effect (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed →" (see FIGS. 42(i) and (j)). ) starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during the chance mode (during the general electric support) and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) occurs, as shown in FIG. In the device 41, a new decoration special figure starting memory display appears and the number of the decoration special figure starting memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. .
Further, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), a battle effect is executed and the support count is changed (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Each time the support count is changed, the number of allied characters may be increased or decreased, or the level of the allied characters may be increased or decreased. Specifically, for example, if the support count after the change is less than the support count before the change, the number of allied characters is maintained (or reduced) so that the support count after the change is equal to the support count before the change. If it is more than the number of times, the number of ally characters may be increased as shown in FIG. 42(k), for example.

In addition, the identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the design for the support is the general design (designs 1 to 9)
It may be composed of only, may be composed of general symbols and special symbols (special symbols for support), or may be composed only of special symbols. .
That is, the support winning symbol temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 is shown in FIG. 42(f).
It may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42(l), it may consist of general symbols and special symbols as shown in FIG. It may be configured. Further, the support winning symbols stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 42(g),
As shown in FIG. 42(m), it may consist of a general pattern and a special pattern,
It may be composed only of special symbols.

In the present embodiment, when both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game.
FIGS. 44 to 48 show a case where the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "support hit" is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game. 44 to 47 are examples of displays on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 48 is an example of a timing chart.

When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, Fig. 44 (a)
As shown in , in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decoration game display section 81
And the game result is stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82, and the decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display section 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing". In addition, Fig. 4
In the example shown in 4 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "off".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, FIG.
As shown in 4(b), in the display device 41, a transition effect (a display to shift the decoration special figure start memory display) is executed, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a changes. However, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 44(b),
On the display device 41, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and on the collective display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , a new decoration special figure start memory display appears and the number of decoration special figure start memory displays in the standby memory display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, collective display In the device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes. Here, the new decoration special figure starting memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 .

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, FIG.
As shown in 4(d), in the display device 41, the variable display is completed, the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, and the in-execution memory display is displayed. The decoration special figure start memory display of the part 84 (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) disappears. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is completed and the special figure 1 indicator 51
, the game result is displayed. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "235", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 2, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, FIG.
As shown in 4(e), in the display device 41, the transition effect is executed, and the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Next, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. 44(e),
On the display device 41, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and on the collective display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, the display device 41 is displayed as shown in FIG. In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t7
1) As shown in FIGS. 44(g) and 48, in the display device 41, the variable display ends, and the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section . At the same time, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51.例文帳に追加Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". It is "625", and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Also, here, the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 1, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG.
The numerical value of b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes. Here, since the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, even if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition effect (decoration special Effect of displaying to shift the figure start memory display) is not executed.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. The variable display of the display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts. After that, the result of the running special figure fluctuation display game is "Sapo hit"
In this case, the reach variation starts on the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 (t74), the battle effect starts on the display device 41 (t75), and the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "tie".

Next, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the game result is temporarily stopped (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display section 81. FIG. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. The game result is statically displayed on the game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, and the variable display is terminated on the collective display device 50, and the game result is statically displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is "supporter win A", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "supporter win A". "434", and the collective display device 50
In, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "Sapo per A".

Also, as shown in FIGS. 45(c) and 48, when the stop display time starts (t76),
When the support number notification effect starts, first, the support number to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win A", and the number of support times corresponding to "support win A" is 20.
Since the number of times of support given this time is 20 times, an effect (for example, an effect of displaying "20 times left" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 45(c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 that were hidden at the start of the battle effect reappear.
Here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t77). When the variable time starts (t77), as shown in FIG. 48, the game shifts to the chance mode.

When the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 45(d) and 48, the display device 41 displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The variable display of starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.

When the variable display starts (t78), the number of remaining supports is notified in the support number notification effect. 45 (
As shown in d) and (e), an effect (for example, an effect of displaying "19 remaining times" on the support number display unit 86) is executed to notify that the remaining number of times of support is 19 times.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed hitting (for example, an effect displaying "Right-handed hit →" (see FIGS. 45(d) and (e)). ) starts.

Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 48, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG.
) is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45(e), an effect (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode screen") is executed to notify that the chance mode is on. Here, the first decoration game display portion 81 (large pattern) is hidden by the chance mode entering screen or the chance mode in-progress screen to reduce the visibility, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entering screen and the chance mode in-progress screen may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the first decoration game display section 81 so as not to reduce the visibility, or the chance mode entering screen and The first decoration game display section 81 may be displayed on the near side of the screen during the chance mode so as not to lower the visibility.

In this embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display is hidden at the start of the battle production and redisplayed at the time of design determination. When the pending change effect is executed in the standby memory display part 83 before it is hidden, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display part 83 is hidden at the start of the battle production and the pattern. When re-displayed at the time of confirmation, for example, FIGS.
), it may be redisplayed in a state in which the pending change effect is not executed (the pending change effect is canceled), or, for example, as shown in FIGS. It may be re-displayed in the state of

Specifically, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 45 (a) and the decoration special figure start memory at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 45 (a)), while it is a normal display mode at the time of re-display (Fig. 45 (c)) . That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode has been reset.
Also, in FIG. 45(f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 45(h) , It is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (Fig. 45 (f)), and when re-displayed (Fig. 45 (h)
) also has the specific display mode.

Further, when re-displaying with the pending change effect being executed, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of re-display is, for example, as shown in FIGS. , or may be different from the rendering mode before non-display, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) to (e).
Specifically, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. The display is a decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the same starting memory. The display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display is the same before non-display (Fig. 45(f)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 45(h)). In other words, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before non-display (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Also, in FIG. 46(a), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 46(c) , It is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. Of the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is before non-display (Fig. 46 (a)) and at the time of re-display (Fig. 46 (c)), but the display mode (here, the shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result is displayed before non-display (Fig. 46(a)
)) and at the time of re-display (FIG. 46(c)).

The battle production is not only started during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support win", but also starts during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result other than "support win". is possible, but if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game that was being executed at the start of the battle production is "support hit" and if it is not "support hit", whether or not there is a pending change effect at the time of reappearance Alternatively, the effect mode of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance may be changed.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game (for example, at the start of the battle production) and at the start of the stop display time of the special figure fluctuation display game (
When the pattern is confirmed), and if the pending change effect is executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before it is hidden, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "support If "hit", as shown in FIGS. 45(a) to (e), it is displayed again without execution of the pending change effect, and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "big hit", FIG. 46 ( Similar to a) to (e), redisplay in the state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is different from before non-display), and if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is "missing", FIG. 45 ( As in f) to (j), it may be redisplayed in a state where the pending change effect is executed (the effect mode is the same as before non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84, and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular variation is configured not to display, but is not limited to this. For example, the standby memory display unit 83 can display only the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation, and the running memory display unit 84 only displays the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation. Instead, it may be possible to display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation.
In that case, when the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84 is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to irregular fluctuation, for example, in FIG. 47 (a) ~ (e) As shown, the pending change effect may be executed in the in-execution memory display unit 84,
For example, as shown in FIGS. 47(f) to (j), the pending change effect may not be executed in the in-execution memory display section 84. FIG.

It should be noted that the pending change effect executed in the standby storage display section 83 is the standby storage display section 8
By displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in 3 in a specific display mode, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display and the result of the prediction such as the fluctuation pattern. is.
In addition, the pending change effect executed in the running memory display section 84 is displayed in the running memory display section 8
By displaying the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in 4 in a specific display mode, the result of the special figure variation display game (currently running special figure variation display game) corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display It is a production that suggests such as fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 in FIG. 47 (c), and the decorative special figure starting memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. Is a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the same special figure variation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is the same before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (c)) and after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (e)). ing. In other words, the transition is made to the in-execution storage display section 84 in a state in which the display mode before the transition is inherited.
It should be noted that the display mode after shifting to the in-execution storage display section 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before shifting. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decorative special figure starting memory display, the display mode (in the case of this embodiment, color) for suggesting the look-ahead result is taken over even after the transition,
A display mode (for example, shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result may be different before and after the transition.

Also, in FIG. 47(h), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 and the decoration special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84 in FIG. 47(j) are the same It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is a specific display mode before moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (h)), while after moving to the running memory display unit 84 (Fig. 47 (j)) has a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process is shifted to the in-execution storage display section 84 .

In addition, since only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main variation is displayed in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 is the first start memory In the case of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to , the decoration special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts, and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, when the first starting memory generated before the chance mode starts is not digested during the chance mode, the pending change effect for the first starting memory is performed before the chance mode starts. If it has been executed, when the chance mode ends, it may reappear with the display mode taken over before the start of the battle effect.

45(d), (i), FIG. 46(d), FIG. 47(d), and (i), the memory display unit 83 during standby and the memory display unit 84 during execution display the chance mode entry screen. hidden in, but not limited to. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen is a size that does not overlap the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 (including the decorative special figure start memory display) (for example, the same size as the chance mode screen) , or the waiting memory display section 83 and the executing memory display section 84 may be displayed on the near side of the screen for entering the chance mode.
Further, when the decoration special figure variation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 is a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation,
The decoration special figure start memory display (the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) of the standby memory display unit 83 may be hidden. 45(a), (f), and FIG. 46(a)
), in the example shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (f), the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 is turned off It can also be used as a display.

In the example shown in FIGS. 44 to 48, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is "Lost" is the result mode, and the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is "
This is the result mode of "miss". Therefore, in a state in which the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern (loose pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the special figure 2 Variation display of the variation display game (variation display in the special figure 2 indicator 52) and variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game (
Variable display on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82) is started.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 match If not, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" is not limited to the battle effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, in addition to (or in place of) the battle effect during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support win", a pseudo continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbols may be executed. .
FIG. 50 shows an example of executing a pseudo-continuous effect as a special effect performed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support win C". Since FIG. 50(a) shows the same state as FIG. 45(a), its description is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special-figure variation display game being executed is "support win", the pseudo-continuous effect is started in the first decoration game display section 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 50(b), first, a support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "4") indicating the number of support to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is "C for support", the number of support actually given is 1000
As for times, here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support is temporarily displayed to suggest that the number of times of support that is less than the number of times of support actually given is given. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be provided is 20 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the suggested number of times is
to be displayed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the re-fluctuation display of the large pattern starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(
As shown in d), a support number suggesting special symbol and general symbol (here, "5") suggesting the number of support to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 80 times, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(e), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(e), the re-fluctuation display of the large pattern starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(
As shown in f), a support number suggesting special symbol and a general symbol (here, "6") suggesting the number of support to be provided are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating the number of times of support to be added is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for indicating the number of times of support indicating that the number of times of support to be added is 900 is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(g), the re-fluctuation display of the large pattern starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 50(
As shown in h), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 stop displaying the game result.
In this case, since the game result is "support win C", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 in the display device 41 is the result mode of "support win C". It is "656".

Further, as shown in FIG. 50(i), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be given this time is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times. Effect of displaying "Support 1000 times!"
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, the game shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 50(j).

In FIG. 50, the case of executing a pseudo-continuous effect during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the pseudo continuous effect is a special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "support hit". It can also be executed during the game. The same applies to special effects (for example, battle effects) other than the pseudo-continuous effects.
Also, in FIG. 50, the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the pseudo-continuous effect is a special figure in which the result is "support hit A". It can be executed during a variable display game, and it is also possible to execute it during a special figure variable display game in which the result is "support hit B".

In the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "Sapo Hit A",
For example, FIGS. 50(d) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect starts, FIG.
As shown in (b), first, the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (c), the re-varying display of the large symbols starts, and then the first decoration game display section 81
, the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect ends. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result ("support hit A" result mode is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82). "434") is stopped, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

Also, in the pseudo-continuous effect executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit B", for example, FIGS. 50(f) to (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo continuous effect starts,
As shown in FIG. 50(b), first, the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped, and then,
As shown in FIG. 50(c), the re-variation display of the large symbols is started, then, as shown in FIG. ), the re-variation display of the large symbols is started, after which the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, and the pseudo-continuous effect is finished. Then, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
, the game result ("545", which is the result mode of "support win B") is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 50(b), (e), and (f), the special symbols for suggesting the number of support are temporarily stopped and displayed in the medium variation display area of the first decoration game display section 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, special symbols for suggesting the number of times of support may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support that is less than the number of times of support actually provided) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, special effects (for example, battle effects, pseudo continuous effects) are normal game state ST
14 or the first specific game state ST11, the game state is the second specific game state S
It can be executed also when it is T12 or the third specific game state ST13. In other words, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether the chance mode is in progress (general electric support is in progress).

Also, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is "support hit" starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified, but the stop display time The number of times of support notified inside may be different from the number of times of support actually provided. Specifically, for example, during the stop display time, it is notified that the number of support times that is less than the number of support actually given is given, and an additional effect that adds the number of support times during the chance mode is executed. good.
FIG. 51 shows an example of an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit C". Since FIG. 51(a) shows the same state as FIG. 45(a), its explanation is omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", FIG.
), the support winning symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, and when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 51(c). At the same time, the support winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . In this case, since the game result is "supporter win C", the display device 41 displays "767" as the supporter win symbol, which is common to "supporter win A", "supporter win B", and "supporter win C". ” is displayed temporarily or stopped. Of course, not only when the game result is "supporter hit C", but also when the game result is "supporter hit A" or "supporter win B", the result common to each "supporter win" as a supporter win symbol It is possible to temporarily stop display or stop display of the mode "767".

Further, as shown in FIG. 51(c), when the stop display time starts, the number of support notification effect starts, and first, the number of support to be given is notified. In this case, the game result is "support win C" and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win C" is 1000 times, but it is notified that the number of times of support given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying “20 remaining times” on the number-of-supports display unit 86) is being executed.
Also, here, the game result is "support hit", the number of first start memories is 1, and the number of second start memories is 0, so when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and The decoration special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time starts, it shifts to the chance mode.

When the game shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode informing effect, first, as shown in FIG. 51(d), an effect informing that the chance mode will be entered (for example, an effect of displaying a "chance mode entry screen") is executed. , as shown in FIG. 51(e), an effect (for example, "
Effect of displaying “chance mode screen”) is executed.
During the chance mode (during the general electric support), the game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37 and the second
When the start memory (second special figure reservation) occurs, as shown in FIGS. 51(f) and (g), in the display device 41, a new decorative special figure start memory display appears and the standby memory display unit As the number of decoration special figure starting memory display of 83 changes, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed in the new decoration special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 51(h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When the performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "80" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display to be shifted to the in-execution memory display section 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display section 86. - 特許庁

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is displayed to transition) When the performance) is executed, the number of times of support displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display shifted to the memory display part 84 during execution is added to the number of times displayed in the number of times of support display part 86.例文帳に追加Here, since "900" is displayed in the decorative special figure start memory display to be shifted to the memory display unit 84 during execution, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed in the support number display unit 86. - 特許庁In addition, the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect for the starting memory corresponding to the decoration special figure starting memory display is executed.

Note that the number of times of support to be added is not limited to "80 times" or "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Also, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support that is smaller than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the starting memory (here, FIG. 51 (f
) Decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to start memory) and decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to start memory (here, start memory generated in FIG. 51 (g)) for pending change production , and the number of times of support to be added to both can be displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory that is not subject to the pending change production.

In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and the start memory of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "jackpot" are supported. A decorative special figure starting memory display that corresponds to the starting memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "small hit" and a special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit" Although it was possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of supports to be added may be displayed only on the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "missing".

For example, if the number of supports to be added can be displayed only in the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the lost game (special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "lost"), the number of support is displayed Since the presence or absence of is suggested whether it is a losing game or not, the player can grasp that the game result is "losing" even before the losing game starts, and the interest of the losing game is increased. It is likely to decline.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in this embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is "loss" and the special figure variation display game whose result is "big hit" are displayed. Corresponding decoration special figure starting memory display, decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "small hit", and special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "support hit" By making it possible to display the number of supports to be added to both the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to Interest can be improved.

In FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional production during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "support hit" was illustrated, but the additional production is "support hit". It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode entered upon completion of a particular special figure 1 variable display game.
In addition, in FIG. 51, the case of executing the additional production during the chance mode entered with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit C" is illustrated, but the additional production is executed when the result is "support hit It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that is A", and the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game with the result of "support hit B". It is also possible to run inside

In addition, in FIG. 51(b), the first decoration game display section 81 temporarily stops displaying "767", which is the result mode common to each "support winning", and in FIG. 51(c), the first decoration game Although "767", which is a result mode common to each "support win", is stopped and displayed on the display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "Support Win C", "656", which is the result mode of "Support Win C", is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81. 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 "Support win C"
"656", which is the result mode of the above, may be stopped and displayed.
For example, when "656", which is a result mode specific to "support winning C", is temporarily stopped or stopped, the player can grasp the number of times of support actually given before the execution of the additional effect. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a possibility that the interest of the additional performance may decrease. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 51, by temporarily stopping or stopping the common result mode for each "supporting hit", the additional effect is actually given at the stage before execution. Since it is possible to obscure the number of times the support is provided, it is possible to improve the interest of the additional production.

Next, an example of game effects will be described. FIGS. 52 to 54 show examples of game effects, and FIG. 55 shows changes in the visibility of the board effect device 44, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, and the middle fluctuation display area 81b. rice field. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the display on the display device 41, the board presentation device 44 that can move forward of the display device 41, and the display on the display board 350 arranged to cover the front surface of the game board 30 are combined. It is possible to execute the production that was made.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the previous special figure variation display game is finished, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82. Since the board effect device 44 is also at the initial position, the board effect device 44 and the standby storage display unit 8
3. The visibility of the identification information of each variable display area including the in-execution storage display section 84 and the intermediate variable display area 81b is high (t100 in FIG. 55).
When the next special figure variation display game is started from this state, as shown in FIG.
The variable display of the identification information is started in each of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c of the decoration game display section 81. FIG. Also, the second decorative game display section 82
However, the variable display of the identification information is started. Since the identification information is variably displayed, the visibility of the identification information in each variable display area including the middle variable display area 81b is lowered (t101 in FIG. 55).
That is, the variable display of identification information changes the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.

As shown in FIGS. 52(c) and (d), in this example, after the start of the variable display, the board effect device 44 moves from the initial position toward the operation position on the center side of the display area. In this process, the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b is gradually hidden, and the visibility is gradually lowered. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(e), the action of the board effect device 44 returning to the initial position gradually improves the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b (from t102 to t103 in FIG. 55).

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(f), display on the display board 350 is performed. Display board 35
By displaying 0, the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81, the second decoration game display portion 82, the memory display portion 83 during execution, and the memory display portion 84 during execution, which overlap with the display, is lowered. Here, the display on the display board 350 is a display that can see through the display device 41 and the board effect device 44 positioned behind, and the identification information displayed in the middle fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44 is visually recognized. The degree of decrease is lower than that of the decrease in sexuality (from t104 to t105 in FIG. 55).
).

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(g), the ready-to-win state is reached, and here again, the board effect device 44 is operating as shown in FIG. 52(h). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lowered (from t106 to t107 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by the board effect device 44. - 特許庁
In addition, as shown in FIG.
The visibility of the identification information b is further reduced (from t107 to t108 in FIG. 55). This effect is effected by changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by the display of the display board 350 .
In addition, since the display on the display board 350 overlaps with the board effect device 44, the second decoration game display section 82, and the standby memory display section 83, the visibility of these also decreases, but they overlap compared to the middle fluctuation display area 81b. Since the area is small, the decrease in visibility is small.

That is, in the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is the lowest, and the visibility of the board effect device 44, the second decoration game display section 82 and the standby memory display section 83 are the lowest. , and the visibility of the in-execution memory display section 84 is higher in that order, and there is a difference in these visibility.
As a result, the middle fluctuation display area 81b and the board effect device 44, which are the parts that the player pays the most attention to, are displayed.
Even in a situation where the production effect by covering the
By ensuring the visibility of 2, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game. information can be easily grasped.
In addition to making a difference in visibility depending on the size of the area where the display on the display panel 350 overlaps, it is also possible to make a difference in visibility depending on the degree of transparency of the display on the display panel 350 . For example, the transparency of the portion overlapping the second decorative game display portion 82 and the standby memory display portion 83 may be set higher than the transparency of the portion overlapping the intermediate fluctuation display area 81b and the board effect device 44.

In this way, by changing the visibility of the identification information of the middle variable display area 81b forming a predetermined image displayed on the display device 41 between the display on the board effect device 44 and the display plate 350, various effects can be obtained. can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
Also, the degree of expectation for a special result can be suggested by the display color and display content of the display board 350.
Since the visibility of is ensured, even if the visibility of the first decoration game display section 81 is lowered, it is possible to grasp the progress of the game and the degree of expectation at the same time.

After that, when the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position,
The visibility of the display device 41 including the medium fluctuation display area 81b is recovered (t109 in FIG. 55). Then, it develops into the SP reach state, and the identification information temporarily stops in the medium fluctuation display area 81b as shown in FIG. 52(j). Due to the temporary stop, the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is improved more than in the state of high speed fluctuation display (t110 in FIG. 55). Further, during execution of the SP reach, the standby storage display section 83 and the execution storage display section 84 are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in this SP ready-to-win effect, an effect is performed in which identification information is transformed into different identification information. As shown in FIG. 53(a), the shape of the identification information begins to deform, and as shown in FIG. 53(b), the identification information is deformed so as to be compressed from the left and right. The visibility of the area 81b is reduced. 53(c), (d)
), the visibility of the medium fluctuation display region 81b improves as the amount of deformation decreases (FIG. 5
t111 to t112 of 5). That is, the effect of transforming the identification information is the first effect of changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display.
Also, the first effect here does not continue the state of low visibility as in variable display, but is a effect of periodically changing between a high visibility state and a low visibility state.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f), the board rendering device 44 operates as shown in FIGS. An effect is being performed and the visibility is further reduced (from t113 to t115 in FIG. 55). This production is a second production in which the visibility of the display on the display device 41 is changed by operating the board production device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41 .
The execution timing of the second effect here is started in a state where the visibility is the lowest in the first effect in which the visibility changes periodically. Visibility is greatly reduced by lowering the visibility due to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 53(i), the display on the display panel 350 is performed while the board effect device 44 is operating, and the visibility is further reduced (from t115 to t116 in FIG. 55).
. This effect is achieved by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350, thereby
A third effect of changing the visibility of the display of 1 is performed.
In the portion where the display on the display board 350 overlaps, the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b has the lowest visibility due to a combination of the deformation, the overlap of the board effect device 44, and the overlap of the display on the display board 350. The visibility increases in the order of visibility of the effect device 44 and visibility of the second decoration game display section 82, and there is a difference in visibility between them.

As shown in FIG. 53(j), when the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44
returns to the initial position (t117 in FIG. 55), and the identification information in the reach state as shown in FIG. 54(a) temporarily stops (t118 in FIG. 55). In this example, the result is a big hit, and FIG.
As shown in 4(b), the board effect device 44 operates and the display on the display board 350 is performed to deterministically notify that the special result will be derived (from t118 to t121 in FIG. 55).
.
After that, the temporary stop is completed, the variable display is stopped, and the stop display time is reached, and as shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed (t122 in FIG. 55). As a result, the visibility of the identification information in the middle variation display area 81b is the highest. Further, during the stop display time, the display of the memory-in-waiting display section 83 and the memory-in-execution display section 84 is resumed.

When the stop display time ends, the special game state is started. As shown in FIG. 54(d), in the fanfare state, the second decoration game display section 82, the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display section 84, the first start memory number display section 85a, and the second start memory number display section are displayed. The display of 85b ends (t123 in FIG. 55).
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 54(e) and (f), the board effect device 4 is displayed during fanfare effect.
4 is operating, and the visibility of the identification information in the medium fluctuation display area 81b is lowered (t1 in FIG. 55).
24 to t127). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54(g), the display is performed on the display panel 350 and the visibility is lowered (from t125 to t126 in FIG. 55).
After that, as shown in FIG. 54(h), the display on the display board 350 ends, the board effect device 44 returns to the initial position, the display on the first decoration game display section 81 also ends, and the display on the display board 350 ends. )
A round game is started as shown in (t128 in FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 54(i), in the round game, a round number display 87a indicating the number of rounds, a type display 87b indicating the type of bonus, a special result display 87c indicating the derived special result, and the number of winning balls are displayed. Acquisition number display 87d shown is displayed.
As shown in FIG. 54(j), the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed even during the round game.
, a part or all of the special result display 87c and the number-of-acquisitions display 87d are changed in visibility depending on the display of the board effect device 44 or the display board 350. FIG. Of course, only one of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 may be performed.

When the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 are performed during the special game state, it is notified that the special game state more advantageous to the player than the contents of the special game state initially notified will be executed. There is a case of so-called promotion production.
For example, during the fanfare production as shown in FIGS. 54(e) to (g), or during the
It is conceivable to perform a promotion effect together with the operation of the board effect device 44 and the display of the display board 350 during the round as shown in FIG.
In this case, the display of the result mode on the first decorative game display section 81 shown in FIG.
By lowering the visibility of the special result display 87c shown in 4(j) by the display of the board effect device 44 and the display board 350, the first decoration game display section 81 and the special result display 87c are displayed in an advantageous manner for the player. You can effectively direct the process of change.

As described above, by changing the display of the display device 41 to change the visibility of the display, and by operating the board effect device 44 so as to overlap the display device 41, the display of the display device 41 is changed. A second effect of changing the visibility and a third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the board effect device 44 and the display device 41 by displaying a predetermined display on the display board 350 are executed in combination. Therefore, the visibility of the display device 41 can be changed in multiple stages, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display panel 350 are performed so that the degree of visibility of the plurality of types of display on each part of the display device 41 is different, thereby enhancing the effect of rendering. In addition, visibility can be ensured for necessary display.
Also, the board rendering device 44 is opaque, and the display on the display plate 350 is translucent, so that the degree of deterioration of visibility is different, so that rendering with different tastes can be achieved.

In addition, a first effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by deformation or the like, a second effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and a display panel 35
The third effect of changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 by displaying 0 can be executed independently, or can be executed in any combination.

Further, the visibility of the middle fluctuation display area 81b may not be changed by executing the third effect.
In the above example, since the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81b is not completely hidden by the board effect device 44, the visible part of the identification information of the medium-variation display area 81 is visually recognized by displaying the display board 350. However, by completely hiding the identification information of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the board effect device 44, the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81 changes even if the display board 350 is displayed. you can avoid it.
In addition, by hiding the medium-variation display area 81 and the first decoration game display section 81 in advance when the display board 350 is displayed, the medium-variation display area 81 can be visually recognized even when the display board 350 is displayed. You can keep your gender from changing.

It should be noted that the volume emitted from the speaker 19 when the second effect that changes the visibility of the display of the display device 41 by operating the board effect device 44 forming a movable accessory so as to overlap the display device 41 is executed. is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect. As a result, the effect is different depending on the execution timing of the second effect.
In the above example, during execution of the special figure variation display game, the closer the end of the special figure variation display game is, the louder the sound volume is. Before reaching the reach state (from t102 to t103 in FIG. 55) the volume is the lowest, and when the reach state occurs (from t106 to t10 in FIG. 55)
9), during SP reach (from t114 to t117 in FIG. 55), and immediately before stopping the variable display (from t118 to t121 in FIG. 55), the volume increases in this order. As a result, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation towards the derivation of the result, and to improve the interest of the game. Note that the volume during operation of the board effect device 44 in the special game state (from t124 to t127 in FIG. 55) is the same volume as during the SP reach.

In addition, regarding the light emission mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 when the third effect of performing a predetermined display on the display board 350 is performed, before the occurrence of the SP reach (Fig. 55 t102 to t103, t106 to t109) and after SP reach occurs (t114 to t117, t118 to t121 in FIG. 55). As a result, the effect is different depending on whether or not the SP reach occurs.
In the above example, the LED is extinguished before the occurrence of the SP reach, and after the occurrence of the SP reach, the light emission mode continues the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect, or the light emission mode suggests the degree of expectation for a special result. I am trying to It should be noted that, even during the special game state, the light emission mode before the execution timing of the second effect is continued.

When the display board 350 is displaying a predetermined display, the display board 35 is turned off by turning off the other LEDs.
A display board 350 such as the display of 0 becoming conspicuous and suggesting the occurrence of SP reach
It is possible to enhance the effect of directing by.
In addition, after the occurrence of the SP reach, the image of the display device 41 and the S
The P-reach effect is performed, and the effect by the display of the display board 350 can be added while continuing these effects, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The volume during execution of the second effect is not limited to the order described above.
The lower the visibility of 1b, the lower the volume may be.
Also, regarding the volume during the execution of the third effect, for example, the lower the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b, the higher the volume. It may be made smaller.

Furthermore, the sound volume may differ between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing, or the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect may be set such that the sound volume becomes louder when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the sound volume may be made smaller than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, when the volume is the lowest (for example, before reaching the reach state (t102 to t103 in FIG. 55)), the volume is the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game The sound volume may be smaller than that when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
In addition, when the volume is the largest among the cases where the second effect and the third effect are combined (for example, S
The volume during P reach (from t114 to t117 in FIG. 55)) may be smaller than the volume when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. .

Predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during execution of the third effect
The light emission mode of is not limited to the one described above and can be arbitrarily set.
In addition, the light emitting mode of the predetermined LEDs provided in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 during execution of the second effect may also be changed according to the execution timing of the effect. For example, S
You may make it differ before generation|occurrence|production of P reach and after generation|occurrence|production of SP reach.

Furthermore, the light emission mode may be different between when the second effect and the third effect are combined and when they are not combined.
For example, in a situation where it is possible to select either the case where the second effect and the third effect are combined at the same timing, or the case where the second effect or the third effect is executed independently, the second effect and the third effect The light emission intensity of the LED may be higher when the second effect or the third effect is performed alone than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone. Conversely, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the second effect or the third effect is executed alone.
By doing so, it is possible to provide different effects depending on whether or not the effects are combined, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the light emission intensity when the light emission intensity of the LED is the lowest is the second during the execution of the special figure variation display game The emission intensity of the LED may be lower than when the effect or the third effect is executed alone.
In addition, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity when the light emission intensity of the LED is the highest is the second effect or the third effect performed alone during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. It may be made smaller than the emission intensity of the LED in the case.

Further, when the second effect and the third effect are combined, the light emission intensity of the LED may be changed according to the volume level.
For example, the higher the volume, the higher the emission intensity of the LED, or the higher the volume, the lower the emission intensity of the LED.

The execution timing of the operation of the board rendering device 44 and the display of the display board 350 is not limited to the above example and can be set arbitrarily.
Further, the method for reducing the visibility of the identification information in the medium-variation display area 81b is not limited to the method described above, and other methods may be used. For example, the visibility may be reduced by inverting the identification information vertically or horizontally, or the visibility may be reduced by changing the color, brightness, saturation, or transparency of the identification information. The visibility may be lowered by overlapping the images of .

In addition, as the first effect, as shown in FIG. 52(b), a variable display effect is included in which the identification information is operated in the same manner in a plurality of variable display areas with the start of the special figure variable display game. However, this effect may not be included in the first effect.
For example, as shown in FIG. 52(g), in a situation where the operating states of the identification information are different in a plurality of variable display areas and there is a difference in visibility, the effect that reduces the visibility of the identification information may be set as the first effect. You can do it. Also, the first effect may be the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information after the start of the ready-to-win state.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 52(b), with the start of the special figure variation display game, the visibility of the identification information is reduced by changes other than making the identification information operate in the same way in a plurality of variation display areas. may be used as the first production.

Further, in the above example, the visibility of the identification information in the middle fluctuation display area 81b is reduced, but the visibility of the identification information in the left fluctuation display area 81a and the right fluctuation display area 81c may be reduced. . Furthermore, the visibility may be reduced for images other than the identification information, such as background images, effect images, images indicating the firing direction, and the like.
In addition, reducing the visibility can be said to make it difficult to see, and these states may include making it invisible.
In addition, reducing the visibility includes covering a part or the whole of an object so that it cannot be seen, or covering a part or the whole of the object with an object or an image having low translucency.

Further, the operation and shape of the board rendering device 44 are not limited to those described above, and any type may be used. Furthermore, although the identification information of the middle fluctuation display area 81b is overlapped to reduce the visibility, the visibility may be reduced by overlapping the identification information of the left fluctuation display area 81a or the right fluctuation display area 81c. The operating range and operating mode of the device 44 can be arbitrarily set.
In addition, visibility may be reduced by overlapping images other than the identification information.
It may be superimposed on an image that instructs the shooting direction or the like to reduce the visibility.

Also, the display on the display plate 350 may be displayed at a position overlapping only the front surface of the board effect device 44 when the board effect device 44 is at the position when the board effect device 44 is lowered and the operation is completed.
By doing so, the first display that changes the visibility by the deformation of the medium fluctuation display area 81b or the like can be obtained.
The effect, the second effect of changing the visibility of the medium fluctuation display area 81b by the operation of the board effect device 44, and the third effect of changing the visibility of the board effect device 44 by the display of the display plate 350 are independently provided. and can be executed.
That is, in the case of executing the first effect, the second effect or the third effect alone, or in any combination of the first effect and the second effect, the first effect and the third effect, the second effect and the third effect A case of execution and a case of executing a combination of the first effect, the second effect and the third effect can be executed respectively.

Further, when the second effect or the third effect is executed, the middle variation display area 81b and the first decoration game display section 81 may not be displayed. Furthermore, when executing the second effect or the third effect, the waiting memory display section 83 and the executing memory display section 84 may not be displayed.
In this case, the pedestal portions of the standby storage display section 83 and the in-execution storage display section 84 (the rectangular display indicating the position where the storage display is displayed in FIG. 52(a)) may be left displayed, or may be displayed. You can choose not to.

Moreover, when a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device is used as the display panel 350, it is possible to perform more diverse displays.
For example, when the visibility of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 is lowered due to the display on the display plate 350, the third decoration game may be displayed on the display plate 350. FIG. Also, the board effect device 44 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8 .
The third decorative game may be displayed on the display panel 350 when the visibility of the second game is lowered. By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the progress of the special figure variation display game.
The display position of the third decoration game may be a position that does not overlap the first decoration game display portion 81 or the display position of the second decoration game, or may overlap the display position of the second decoration game.
In the above-described example, in the situation where the board effect device 44 overlaps the front side of the medium fluctuation display region 81b, the medium fluctuation display region 81 is positioned in front of the board production device 44 on the display plate 350.
The identification information of b may be displayed.
Further, a predetermined display may be performed at a position in front of the board effect device 44 in accordance with the operation of the board effect device 44, and only the visibility of the board effect device 44 may be reduced.

In addition, the display on the display board 350 indicates that the standby storage display section 83, the execution storage display section 84, the first
When the visibility of the starting memory number display section 85a and the second starting memory number display section 85b is lowered, the display panel 350 may display the starting memory display, the running memory display, or the starting memory number. By doing so, it is always possible to clearly grasp the state of the starting memory.

Further, in the above example, the board effect device 44 is arranged behind the display plate 350, and the board effect device 44 can execute the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The display board 350 can execute the third effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
I was trying to use it as a means of performance.
The display plate 350 may be arranged behind the board effect device 44. In this case, the display plate 350 is the first effect capable of executing the second effect of changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The board effect device 44 serves as the second effect means capable of executing the third effect of changing the visibility of the first effect means.
That is, it is sufficient that the second effect means for changing the visibility of the first effect means is positioned in front of the first effect means for changing the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41. The structure of the production means may be of any type. For example, both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the board effect device 44, and both the first effect means and the second effect means may be the display board 350.
Further, it is possible to allow three or more effect means to be overlapped in the front and back, so that the effect means located in front changes the visibility of the effect means located in the back.
Further, when the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41 is changed by another image displayed on the display device 41, the first image that changes the visibility of the predetermined image on the display device 41 can be used.
The display device 41 serves as a rendering means.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the visibility is changed by the first effect. display means (display device 41) for displaying possible predetermined images, first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of executing a second effect for changing the visibility of the predetermined image, and visibility of the first effect means and a second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing a third effect that changes the .
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, display means (display device 41) for displaying a predetermined image, first effect means (board effect device 44) capable of executing an effect to change the visibility of the predetermined image, and change the visibility of the first effect means and a second effect means (display board 350) capable of executing the effect to cause the player to play.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, display means (display means) capable of executing display regarding the game a device 41), a movable accessory (board effect device 44) operable to overlap the front side of the display means, and a display means and the movable accessory arranged in front of the display means and the movable accessory so that the display means and the movable accessory can be seen through. a display board 350 capable of displaying a predetermined display together with A first effect of changing the visibility of the display by changing the display of the display means, and a second effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means by operating the movable accessory so as to overlap the display means. And, by displaying a predetermined display on the display panel 350, it is possible to execute the third effect of changing the visibility of the display of the display means.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect can be executed independently, or can be executed in combination.
Therefore, it is possible to execute a variety of effects, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means can display on the display means a first decoration game that is a display corresponding to the game and a second decoration game that is a display corresponding to the game and is smaller than the first decoration game, When the third effect is being executed, the visibility of the second decoration game is made higher than the visibility of the first decoration game.
Therefore, the progress of the game can be confirmed by at least the second decoration game.

In addition, a start memory means (game control device) for storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that are the right to execute the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the start prize winning area (start prize winning port 36, normal variable prize winning device 37). 100), the effect control means can display a start memory display showing information about the start memory on the display means, and when the third effect is being executed, the visibility of the start memory display is equal to or higher than that of the first decoration game. The visibility is higher than the visibility of
Therefore, it becomes possible to check the information in the starting memory.

[Modified example 1 of support hit determination]
In the above-described embodiment, the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit lottery) is used to perform small hit determination (small hit lottery) and support hit determination (support hit lottery). That is, in the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 26, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 7(a)), and the determination result is If it is a big hit, it acquires the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number (see FIG. 7(b)), and if the judgment result is a small hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number. is acquired (see FIG. 7(c)), and if the determination result is a support hit, stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 7(d
)), and when the determination result is neither of them, the stop symbol information of the lost is acquired, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the support hit is derived only in the low probability state, but the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Also, the support hit may be derived regardless of the game state, or the support hit may be derived only when there is no general electric support (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11). You can do it. In addition, it may be possible to select whether or not the support win can be derived based on the game state.

[Modified example 2 of support hit determination]
In the above-described embodiment, the lottery is performed using a common jackpot random number for the big win, the small win, and the support hit. A lottery may be performed using a big win random number for a small win, and a lottery may be performed using a support win random number for a support win. In this case, for example, distribution ratios as shown in FIG. 56 are obtained. Specifically, for example, a big hit determination and a small hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 56 (a)), and if the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, a support hit is determined using a support hit random number. A determination is made (see FIG. 56(d)).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the stop symbol information is acquired using a common special symbol random number in any of the big hit, the small hit and the support hit, but the symbol random number corresponding to each result is provided. Alternatively, a special symbol random number may be used for the big hit and the small hit, and a support hit symbol random number may be used for the support hit.
For example, when the judgment result is a big hit, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired (see FIG. 56(b)), and when the judgment result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit pattern random number. (See FIG. 56(c)), and if the determination result is a support hit (that is, if "support is activated"), the stop pattern information corresponding to the support hit symbol random number is obtained. (Refer to FIG. 56(e)), if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. 57 instead of the special figure starting opening switch common processing shown in FIG. In this special figure start opening switch common processing, the jackpot pattern random numbers which are the jackpot pattern random numbers are extracted and prepared in step A140, and the prepared jackpot pattern random numbers are saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM in step A141.
Next, a small winning design random number, which is a small winning design random number, is extracted and prepared (step A143
), save the prepared small winning symbol random number in the small winning symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A144).
After that, the support hit random number is extracted and prepared (step A150a), and the prepared support hit random number is saved in the support hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A150b),
A support winning symbol random number, which is a support winning symbol random number, is extracted and prepared (step A149a).
, the prepared support winning symbol random number is saved in the support winning symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A149b).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 58(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this big hit flag 1 setting process, after performing the process of step A363, the random number per support is loaded from the random number storage area per special support 1 of RWM (for reservation number 1) and prepared (step A374), After performing a process (step A375) for clearing the random number storage area per support (for the reserved number 1) to 0, the process proceeds to step A364. Moreover, the process of step A370 is not performed,
The support hit can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 58(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this big hit flag 2 setting process, after performing the process of step A383, the support per random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 2 support random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) (step A394), and the special figure After performing a process (step A395) for clearing the random number storage area per 2 supports (for the reserved number 1) to 0, the process proceeds to step A384. Moreover, the process of step A370 is not performed,
The support hit can be derived regardless of the game state.

[Support hit determination process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 replaces the support hit determination process shown in FIG.
Support hit determination processing shown in FIG. 59 is executed. In this support hit determination process, step A42
After performing the processing of 2, it is determined whether or not the value of the target per support random number is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a).

Then, if the value of the target random number per support is less than the lower limit judgment value for support (step A4
23a; Y), that is, if it is not a supporter's hit, the determination result is set to lose (step A428), and the supporter's hit determination process is terminated. Also, if the value of the target random number for the support hit is not less than the lower limit judgment value for the support hit (step A423a; N), it is determined whether it is in a high probability state (step A424). Then, if the high probability state (step A424; Y),
A support per upper limit judgment value in high probability is set (step A425), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target support per support random number is greater than the support per upper limit judgment value (step A427a). Also, if it is not in a high probability state (step A424; N), set the upper limit judgment value per support in low probability (step A426), and determine whether the value of the target random number per support is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (Step A427a).

If the value of the random number per support of the target is greater than the upper limit judgment value per support (step A427a;
Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step A42
8), end the jackpot determination process. In addition, if the value of the target support hit random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (step A427a; N), that is, if it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination End the process.

The probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability set value, or may be the same. If the probability setting value is different, for example, the lower the probability setting value, the easier it is to win the lottery for the supporter (that is, setting 1 is the most likely to win, and setting 6 is the least likely to win). is good and vice versa. Moreover, the probability of winning the lottery for the supporter may be different for each probability state of the big win, or may be the same. When the probability of a big hit is changed for each state, for example, it may be possible to make it easier to win in the case of a low probability state (normal probability state) than in the case of a high probability state, or vice versa. . Also, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Also, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. - 特許庁

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, the normal game state ST14
In , if the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit judgment is performed using the support hit random number, and if the judgment result is a big hit, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired, and the judgment result is Acquire stop pattern information corresponding to the small hit pattern random number when it is a small hit,
When the determination result is a support win, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support win symbol random number is acquired, and when the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired, and in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, If the judgment result is a big hit without performing the support hit judgment using the support hit random number, the stop pattern information corresponding to the big hit pattern random number is acquired, and if the judgment result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit pattern random number. If the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, then the stop symbol information of a misalignment may be acquired. i.e.
When it is in a high probability state or when it is in a general electricity support, the processing related to the support (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to
A151d, steps A373a-A373b, steps A370-A372, steps A393a-A393b, steps A390-A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modified example 3 of support hit determination]
Further, for example, without performing the support hit determination, it is possible to acquire the support hit design or the lost design using the special symbol random number. That is, if the game is not a big hit or a small hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number may include the stop design information of the win and the support hit. In this case, for example, the distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, the big hit determination and the small hit determination are performed using the big hit random number (see FIG. 60 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number (see FIG. 60(b)),
When the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 60(c)).

Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a low probability state, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special pattern random number, stop design information of losing or stop design information of support hit is acquired (Fig. 60) (d)).
In addition, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit and is in a high-probability state, stop symbol information of losing is acquired.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 62 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A4
40; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A462). If it is in a low probability state (step A462; Y), the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process of selecting a support hit (steps A447 to A452) is performed. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A462; N), the process (step A453, A454) which sets a losing design is performed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A4
80; N), it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A502). If it is in a low probability state (step A502; Y), it is lost by a special figure random number using a special figure 2 per sapo symbol table in which the distribution value shown in the low probability column of FIG. 60 (d) is set. Alternatively, a process of selecting a support hit (steps A487 to A492) is performed. Moreover, when it is not in a low probability state (step A502; N), the process (step A493, A494) which sets a losing design is performed.

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, the normal game state ST14
In (low-probability no support), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, as stop pattern information corresponding to the support hit pattern random number, the stop pattern information for the support hit or the stop pattern information for the loss is acquired, and the specified In the game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, the stop symbol information of losing may be obtained.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the first specific game state ST11), or the support win may be derived regardless of the game state.

[Modified example 4 of support hit determination]
The small winning pattern (result mode of the small winning) and the support winning pattern (result mode of the supporting win) may be used together. Specifically, for example, by providing a combined design that serves as both a small winning design and a support winning design,
When the dual-purpose symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device 41 (and the collective display device 50), the chance mode (third specific game state ST13) may be entered after the small winning game state is finished.
In this case, for example, the distribution ratio is as shown in FIG. Specifically, for example, using a big hit random number, perform a big hit determination and a small hit determination (see FIG. 64 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number is obtained (see FIG. 64(b)).
Then, when the determination result is a small hit, as the stop pattern information corresponding to the special pattern random number, the small hits A to C that serve as both the small hit pattern and the support pattern or the small hit pattern that does not serve as the support pattern. Acquire one of the hits D (see FIG. 64(c)).

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A4
40; Y), set a high probability special figure 1 small winning pattern table in which a distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64(c) is set (step A463).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A464), and if it is not in a low probability state (
Step A464; N) performs processing (steps A441 to A445) for selecting a small hit type by a special figure design random number using a special figure 1 small hit design table for high probability.
Also, in the case of the low probability state (step A464; Y), set the low probability special figure 1 small winning pattern table in which the distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set Then (step A465), the process of selecting the small hit type by the special pattern random number (step A441 ~ A
445).

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
In this special figure 2 stop design setting process, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A4
80; Y), a special figure 2 small winning pattern table for high probability in which a distribution value as shown in the high probability column of FIG. 64(c) is set is set (step A503).

Next, it is determined whether it is in a low probability state (step A504), and if it is not in a low probability state (
Step A504; N) performs processing (steps A481 to A485) for selecting a small hit type by a special figure design random number using a special figure 2 small hit design table for high probability.
Also, in the case of a low probability state (step A504; Y), a special figure 2 small winning pattern table for low probability in which a distribution value as shown in the low probability column of FIG. 64 (c) is set is set. Then (step A505), the process of selecting the small hit type by the special pattern random number (step A481 ~ A
485).

Also in this modification, the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST14 (low-probability no support). Specifically, for example, the normal game state ST14
In (low-probability no support), when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, as stop pattern information corresponding to the support hit pattern random number, the stop pattern information for the support hit or the stop pattern information for the loss is acquired, and the specified In the game states ST11 to ST13, if the determination result is neither a big win nor a small win, the stop symbol information of losing may be obtained.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the case of a high probability state (first specific game state ST11, second specific game state ST12), or a state without general electric support (normal game state ST14, The support hit may be derived only in the first specific game state ST11), or the support win may be derived regardless of the game state.
In addition, in the case of a support win, the number of times of support may be set to be one or more times, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be selected to be 0 times. If 0 is selected as the number of times of support, the specific game state ends with the game. Conversely, in the case of a support win, the number of times of support may be set to 0, and in the case of a small win, the number of times of support may be set to 1 or more.
In addition, in the case of a game machine that performs a so-called two-type game in which only a small win can be won without a big win, a small win lottery is performed using a small win random number, and if a small win is won, It is possible to select a small hit type by a special symbol random number. In this case, 0 may be selected as the number of times of support.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and can generate a special game state when the result of the game becomes a special result, game control means (game control device) for controlling the game 100), and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the special result includes the first special result (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device and the operation of the condition device. There is a second special result (minor win), and the game control means has a normal game state, a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state,
A special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result of the second special results, after the special game state (small winning game state, second special game state) is generated. A specific game state can be generated, and before the game is executed, it can be determined whether the result of the game will be a first special result, a second special result, or a losing result. Become.
Therefore, even in the case of the second special result, the specific game state can be generated, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

[Modified example 5 of support hit determination]
Although the selection of the type of support hit is performed by the special symbol random number, it may be selected by the big hit random number.
For example, as the judgment value of the jackpot random number, the range of the support hit is divided into the ranges of the support hit A, the support hit B, and the support hit C, and if the extracted jackpot random value falls within the support hit range, which range Depending on whether or not it is applicable, it is also possible to set the win for the supporter and the symbol for the supporter. In this case, for big hits and small hits, the type is selected by the special symbol random numbers, but like the support hit, the type is not selected by the special symbol random numbers, and the type is selected by the big hit random numbers. good.
In addition, in the case of a game machine that performs so-called two-type games in which only small wins can be won without big wins, the lottery and selection of types of support wins are similarly performed using small win random numbers for drawing small wins. is possible.

[Other modification 1]
The normal variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed players can win (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, in the case of frequently stopping support win symbols (support win A symbols, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of times of support, chance mode starts and ends frequently. By arranging the normal variable winning device 37 at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, it is not necessary to separate the game balls into the left game area and the right game area according to the start and end of the chance mode. Gone. In addition, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win, the large winning opening and the normal winning opening are positioned upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. A variable winning device 37 may be provided with a function (such as a nail or a channel) for distributing game balls. In addition, the support winning symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support winning A symbol corresponding to the support number of times of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 2]
It is also possible to provide a support hit pattern (support hit result mode) in the result mode of the normal figure fluctuation display game without providing a support hit pattern (support hit result mode) in the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game. That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure variation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure variation display game.

[Other modification 3]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game is shifted to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, irrespective of the stopping support winning pattern (the number of times of support provided), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the game shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the support hit pattern (support hit A pattern, etc.) with a relatively small number of corresponding support stops, when shifting to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is executed to prompt the user to accumulate the second start memory. can be Note that the support win symbol corresponding to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol corresponding to a support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the corresponding support count is 1 time. It may be a support winning pattern.
Also, only when the first special figure variation display game after shifting to the chance mode is the special figure 1 variation display game, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed and the second start memory is stored. You can encourage me.
Also, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the shift is made to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction performance may be executed to prompt the player to accumulate the second start memory.

[Other modification 4]
In this embodiment, when it is not in the general electricity support, it is a state in which there is no time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal diagram fluctuation display game, and when it is in the general electricity support, it is a time reduction in which the fluctuation time of the general diagram fluctuation display game is shortened. Because it is in a certain state, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the general electric power is in support, but this is not limited to For example, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed when the general electric power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to accumulate the second starting memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variation display game with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, it shifts to the chance mode and the first special figure variation display game ends. By generating the second starting memory before
After the first special figure variation display game, the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) can be executed, and the game can be progressed in an advantageous manner for the player.
In addition, if the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when it is not in the general electric support is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the general electric power support is in progress, the general electric support It is preferable to set the normal pattern per probability to 0 when not in the middle.

[Other modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of support given this time is always notified when the chance mode is entered. That is, regardless of the stopped support per pattern (number of support given), when the stop display time starts, the number of support given this time is notified. Whether or not to report the number of times of support may be determined according to the number of times of support. Specifically, for example, when a support win symbol (support win A symbol, etc.) corresponding to a relatively small number of support times stops, the number of support times given this time is not notified even if the stop display time starts. In addition, when other support winning symbols are stopped, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support given this time may be notified. Note that the support win symbol that corresponds to a relatively small number of support times is not limited to the support win A symbol that corresponds to a support count of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the corresponding support count is less than 10 times. It may be a certain support winning pattern.

[Other modification 6]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 48, a right-handed instruction effect (instruction of firing direction)
is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game in which the result is the specific result (sapo winning game). That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 7]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (assist winning game) in which the result is the specified result. did. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t68, t78), but it is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the stop display time of the support winning game. It may be started at the start time (t66, t76). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game). Also, the chance mode notification effect and the right-hand hitting instruction effect may be started at the same timing or may be started at different timings.

[Other modification 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 48, the support number notification effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the support win game (t66, t76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support number notification effect may be started at the start of the variation time of the special figure variation display game that is executed first after shifting to the chance mode (t67, t77), or at the beginning of the shift to the chance mode. It may be started at the start of the variable display of the special figure variable display game to be executed (t68, t78). Also, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game).

[Other modification 9]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the same random number is used to obtain the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the support winning pattern, but the big winning pattern, the small winning pattern and the supporting winning pattern are obtained using different random numbers. You can make it work. In other words, different random numbers may be used as the big-hit pattern random number, the small-hit pattern random number, and the supporter-hit design random number to sort the big-hit design, the small-hit design, and the supporter-hit design.

[Other modification 10]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game over the other, or the special figure 1 variation display game And it may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game in order of winning.

[Other modification 11]
The configuration of the gaming machine may be a so-called 1 + 2 gaming machine in which a special game state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h. FIG. 67 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing transitions of game states in the gaming machine of this modified example.
The game state includes a normal game state ST14, a third specific game state ST13, and a special game state ST.
15. There is a small winning game state ST16. Also, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the probability of deriving a special result is always constant.

In the normal game state ST14, there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the variable time of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game is shortened. There is no short time. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, and the main start area is the start winning opening 3
6, and in order to aim at this start winning opening 36, the shooting direction is left-handed. i.e.
It is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The third specific game state ST13 is a state where there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and this normal variation winning device 37
In order to aim for , the firing direction is right-handed. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation. When the special figure variation display game of the number of times of support is executed in this third specific game state ST13, it shifts to the normal game state ST14.

When a big hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the special game state ST15. Then, after the special game state ST15 ends, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Third specific game state ST13
The number of support times in is determined by the type of jackpot.

When a small hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state ST14 or the third specific game state ST13, the game moves to a small win game state ST16. Then, when the game ball flows into the specific area 38h (V winning) in the small winning game state ST16, the state shifts to the special game state ST15. After the end of the special game state ST15 in this case, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small win, and if the number of times of support is set to 0, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. Further, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. The number of times of support in the third specific game state ST13 is determined by the kind of small win.

When the game ball does not flow into the specific area 38h in the small winning game state ST16, the transition destination differs depending on the type of the derived small winning, and if the small winning is set to 0 times for the number of times of support, it is normal. It shifts to game state ST14. Further, when the number of times of support is set to a value other than 0, the game moves to the third specific game state ST13. Third specific game state ST
The number of support in 13 is determined by the kind of small hit.

FIG. 68 shows the allocation rate in the gaming machine of this modified example. All small hits also serve as support symbols, and the number of support times set for each is different. Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, the results of only the support symbols may be provided.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 61(a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 22(a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, the processes of steps A370 to A373 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed. Therefore, in this modified example, the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 24 is not performed.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the big hit flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 61(b) instead of the big win flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 22(b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, the processes of steps A390 to A393 relating to the determination of the support hit are not performed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 65 instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
is not processed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 66 in place of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG.
is not processed.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the process shown in FIG. 69 is performed in the specific area switch monitoring process (step A10) in the special game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first,
It is determined whether or not it is a small hit (step A41). During the small hit here is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If it is not during this small hit (step A4
1;N) ends the specific area switch monitoring process. That is, the specific area switch 38d
is valid only during the period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. Moreover, when it is during a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

If the condition device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Afterwards, processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the presence of this specific area passing flag.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, small hit remaining ball processing (step A18) in the special game processing
, the processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. Also, if the remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. Also, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the processing for ending the small hits after step A863 is performed.

That is, after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, the process for ending the small win is performed. However, at the end, the game ball is the first special variable winning device 38
If there is a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined period of time has passed since it entered the ball, it is assumed that the time required for discharge has passed sufficiently, and the process to end the small hit is performed. ing. Of course, when the remaining ball error is in progress, the processing for ending the small hit may not be performed. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the processing for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed (step A863). When the game ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d is detected and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passage based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. If there is passage through the specific area (step A863; Y), the process proceeds to step A870 to perform processing for generating a special game state. Moreover, when there is no specific area passage (step A863; N), it transfers to step A864, finishes a small hit game state, and performs the process for making a special figure variation display game executable.

In the processing for terminating the small-hit game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure variation display game, 10 for the small-hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A8
64), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A865). next,
Save the small hit ending time in the special game processing timer area (step A866),
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A8
67). Then, the big winning hole count area is cleared (step A868), the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small hit remaining ball processing is finished.

On the other hand, there is a specific area passing (step A863; Y), when performing processing to generate a special game state after step A870, load the command from the decoration special figure command area and prepare (step A870), production command Setting processing is performed (step A871). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save it in the signal external information output data area regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (
Step A874), test signals related to the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, turn on the condition device operating signal, turn on the continuous action device operating signal, turn on the special pattern 2 winning signal) test signal output data area (step A875).

Then, the number of the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A876), the round number upper limit table is set (step A877), and the round number upper limit value (this modification) corresponding to the round number upper limit information In case 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A878). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). 10 rounds are set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small win operation corresponds to the first round, 9 rounds are released in the special game state by setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds. I'm trying

After that, set 3 for fanfare/interval processing as the processing number (step A881), and save in the special figure game processing number area (step A882). moreover,
V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A883
), perform the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
Go to step A868.

With the configuration as described above, the following characteristic game progression is possible.
Since the third specific game state ST13 is a game state with a high possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area 38h and shifts to the special game state ST15 in the small win game state ST16 accompanying the derivation of the small win, the normal game state This game state is more advantageous for the player than ST14, and the longer this game state continues, the more advantageous it becomes for the player.
As the type of the small win derived in the third specific game state ST13, if a small win with a non-zero support count is derived, the third specific game state ST13 can be continued, but the support count is zero. When a small hit is derived, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST14. That is, the derivation of a small win with the number of times of support being 0 triggers the player to fall into a disadvantageous gaming state. By providing such a fall opportunity, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the third specific game state ST13.

From the above, a game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result. game control means (game control device 100) and a normal variable winning device 37 in which the starting condition is established by the winning of the game ball, and the special result is the first with the operation of the condition device.
There are a special result and a second special result that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the game control means is a normal game state and a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than the normal game state. and a special game state can be generated, and based on the result of the game becoming the first special result, the first special game state can be generated as a special game state, and the first special game state is generated. After that, a specific game state can be generated, and based on the result of the game becoming the second special result, a second special game state can be generated as a special game state, and when the second special game state is generated , it is possible to generate the specific game state without generating the first special game state.
Therefore, since the specific game state can be generated based on the second special result that does not involve the operation of the conditional device, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the special variable winning device includes the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 3
9, provided with a specific area 38h into which game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 can flow, and based on the derivation of the first special result or the flow into the specific region 38h, the second special variable winning device 39 A first special game state that can be converted to the open state can be executed, and a second special game state that can convert the first special variable winning device 38 to the open state can be executed based on the derivation of the second special result. Yes, the game control means sets the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the specific game state according to the type of the derived special result, and when the special result is derived during the execution of the specific game state is configured to set the number of executions based on the derived special result by discarding the remaining number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the specific gaming state during execution, and is set based on the special result 0 can be set as the number of times of execution.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set the specific game state to end or not to start the specific game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, a starting prize winning port 36 is provided in which a starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means can execute a first game as a game based on the winning of a game ball to the starting prize winning port 36,
A second game can be executed as a game based on the winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of executions of the specific game state is set to 0 when the result of the second game is the second special result. It should be possible.
Therefore, by setting 0 times, it is possible to set the specific game state to end or not to start the specific game state, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, although the dual-purpose symbol serving as both the small winning symbol and the support winning symbol is used, it is also possible to provide a support symbol that does not serve both as the small winning symbol and the supporting winning symbol.
In this case, by providing a support symbol in which the number of times of support is 0 as the support symbol, the configuration similar to that of the above-described modification can be obtained.
In addition, in the special figure 1 variable display game, only a small win with a support count of 0 is provided, but a small win with a support count other than 0 may be provided, or a small win may not occur. Also good.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be provided, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11) are specified. Game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13)
and a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state, and the game state control means determines that the result of the game is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or In the case of a probability variable A jackpot), it is possible to generate a specific game state after generating a special game state, and if the result of the game is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, a special It is configured so that a specific game state can be generated without generating a game state (see FIG. 8).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the amount of money used by the player and suppress the reduction speed of the balls held. becomes possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the waves of the winning balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is such that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) in the case of a support win). (game control device 100), and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means resets the specific game period being set to correspond to the specific result. The period can be configured to be resettable (Fig. 10
reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it is possible to extend the time, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is such that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) when a support win is reached. (game control device 100), and the setting means adds a period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period when the result of the game becomes the specific result during occurrence of the specific game state. The period can be configured so that it can be reset as a specific game period (see FIG. 11(a)).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST1
3) and a specific game state (second specific game state ST12,
3rd specific game state ST13) and, it is possible to make the production possible execution.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13).
It should be noted that the specific game state that occurred after the special game state (second specific game state ST12
, 3rd specific game state ST13) and the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13) generated without the occurrence of the special game state, different modes of production are executed. can be Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12
, 3rd specific game state ST13) and the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13) generated without the occurrence of the special game state. can be
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. Support hit (support hit B in the case of this embodiment)
may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game]
Next, a special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

71 and 72 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "big hit". FIG. 71 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 72 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 71(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
display mode is "miss" result mode (LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A
1 to A7 are turned off). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also the result mode of "missing" (LED lamp B0 is lit and L
ED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off.

Also, here, since it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so in the display device 41, the first The numerical value of the starting memory number display section 85a is "1" and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". 0 decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure reservation" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (
See FIG. 4 (d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 is "no special figure reservation"
(a mode in which the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (see FIG. 4(d))).

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, The numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) see)
).

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbols) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display section 81, and the left area of the second decoration game display section 82, The variable display of the identification information (small pattern) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. In addition, a variable display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, a mode corresponding to "varying" (the state where the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and the state where the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit alternately switching mode)
(see FIG. 4(b)) is started. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game start, but the variation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the variation time When the time elapses, the variable display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the number of decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 53 The display mode of changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
1) As shown in FIGS. 71(d) and 72, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the special game state, and thereafter, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 81 are hidden simultaneously with the start of the variable time. The 2 decoration game display section 82 reappears. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, because the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (Fig. 71 (
d)), as shown in FIGS. 71(e) and 72, "333" at the start of the variable time
The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t13 to t14). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 71 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases (t14 to t15) during this low-speed variation, and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 71(f) is performed ( t15~
t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 71(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
16) During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 71(g), the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. , the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 71(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 72 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 72, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts to fluctuate at low speed. The timing at which the identification information (medium pattern) displayed in the area starts to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15". Also, "t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation) is "t16
” and “t17”. Further, "t17" is the timing at which the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, "t18" is the timing at which the right symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18" and "t19" are the timings at which the middle symbol starts to temporarily stop. is between

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14-t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t1
4 to t19), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
9) As shown in FIGS. 71(i) and 72, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game results are displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 71(i) is different among FIGS. 71(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
71(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is the result mode of the "jackpot".
Therefore, in this case, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82
The stop pattern (jackpot pattern) and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display in the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, when executing the variable display game, in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 match, Special figure 1 to be executed
The variation display of the variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51
Variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next in a state consistent with the stop pattern of
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is started.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device 52
In a state consistent with the stop pattern of, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next,
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next will be started.

73 and 74 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big win". FIG. 73 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 74 shows an example of a timing chart. FIGS. 73(a) and (b) are
71(a) and 71(b) show the same state, so description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
1) As shown in FIGS. 73(d) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t23). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 73(e). is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, from the start of the variable time to the transition effect (effect to display to move the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) to the start The time is when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (
Figures 71 (a), (b), Figures 71 (e), (f), Figures 73 (a), (b)) and special figure 2
When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 73(e) and (f)) , It is the same as when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in this embodiment, by differentiating the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory, the decoration special figure being displayed It notifies which of the first starting memory and the second starting memory the graphic starting memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 73(d)), as shown in FIGS. 73(e) and 74, the first decorative game display section 81 and second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t23 to t24). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 73 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24 to t25), and eventually a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 73(f) is performed ( t25~
t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
26), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t26 to t27), and eventually comes to a temporary stop state (t27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 73(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 74 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t2
4 to t29), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
9) As shown in FIGS. 73(i) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73(i) is different among FIGS. 73(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
73(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 52, the previous special figure 2
When the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is followed by the special figure Similarly, when the 2-variation display game is executed, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small hit pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next, and the next to be executed special figure 2
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation display is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result mode of "losing" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 75 and 76 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "big win". FIG. 75 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 76 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 75(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "off".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
1) As shown in FIGS. 75(d) and 76, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is played. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t33). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75(e). is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 75(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t33 to t34). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 75 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t31 to t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34 to t35), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 75(f) is performed ( t35~
t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
36), during this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t36 to t37), and eventually comes to a temporary stop state (t37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t38).
In FIG. 76, for the sake of convenience, only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area is shown as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t3
4 to t39), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
9) As shown in FIGS. 75(i) and 76, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75(i) is different among FIGS. 75(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
75(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 51, the previous special figure 1
When the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "jackpot". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) on the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, when executing the 1-variation display game, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small winning pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next special figure 1
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation display is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 77 and 78 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 77 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 78 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 77(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of the first starting memories is 1 and the number of the second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
is the result mode of "mismatch". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 77(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
1) As shown in FIGS. 77(d) and 78, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77(e). is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 77(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t43). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 77 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and during this low-speed variation, the variation speed gradually increases (t44 to t45), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 77(f) is performed ( t45~
t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
46), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 77(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 78 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44-t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t4
4 to t49), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
9) As shown in FIGS. 77(i) and 78, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77(i) is different among FIGS. 77(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
77(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probable variation big hit", Figure 77 and As shown in FIG. 78, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 2 variation display game is executed, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 1 variable display game Figure 2
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 2 display 52 are displayed. In a state inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In the state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of 2 is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot" is set as "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the R jackpot and the 2R jackpot is the first jackpot, and the other one is the second jackpot.
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state in which the stop symbols do not match.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the variation display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of the "variable jackpot"), or the result of the "variable jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal jackpot, if the game balls flow into the specific area, the high probability state is reached.

FIGS. 79 and 80 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot". FIG. 79 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 80 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 79(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 79(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
During execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
1) As shown in FIGS. 79(d) and 80, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the results modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t53). When the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79(e). is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 79(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t53 to t54) , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 79 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t51 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually a high-speed variation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 79(f) is performed ( t55~
t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
56), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 79(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 80 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t5
4 to t59), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
9) As shown in FIGS. 79(i) and 80, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79(i) is different among FIGS. 79(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
79(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", Figure 79 and As shown in FIG. 80, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols on the special figure 1 display 51 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Figure 1
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 1 display 51 are displayed. is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In a state where the 1 stop pattern (first jackpot pattern) does not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "probable variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the R jackpot and the 2R jackpot is the first jackpot, and the other one is the second jackpot.
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state in which the stop symbols do not match.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the variable display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (the result of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result of the "variable jackpot"), or the result of the "variable jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first The stop symbols of the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82, and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
When the stop pattern of the display device 51 is consistent, the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game remain in the matching state. Start the display, and if it is not consistent, start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game in the inconsistent state Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second display device 41 2
When the stop pattern of the decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 are consistent, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the Start the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure will remain in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the 2 variable display game is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching If there is
Also, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are not consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2
The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply referred to as "not matching. case”.

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case of executing the display game has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "big hit", the special figure 1 variable display game with the result of "big hit" is followed by the special figure 2. When executing a variable display game, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "missing" Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to the game, it is "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "not matching", the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "hit When executing the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 73 and 74), and the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 "missing" result mode is stopped and the result is "hit" Special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76), and collective display device 50 Special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 52 and the result is "second big hit" (see FIGS. 77 and 78), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "second big hit ”, the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 79 and 80), but “if not consistent” is limited to these cases not. For example, the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the display device 52 and the result is "loss", or when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, or collective display Special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50 when the result mode of "either one of the big hit or the small hit" is stopped and the result is "either the other of the big hit or the small hit" Figure 1
Even when executing the special figure 2 variable display game next to the variable display game, "if not consistent"
becomes.

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then the left fluctuation display area. The high-speed fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area start high-speed fluctuation (the low-speed fluctuation ends) at the same time. End (start slow variation).
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 is the first
In order to display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 81,
The identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display section 81 is set at the start of the high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25).
, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46,
t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 72, 74, and 76, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "
333”, the variable display starting from “333” starts (t14, t24, t3
4). Then, the effect control device 300, at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t
35), a variable display starting with "333" is displayed in a predetermined fixed result mode (e.g. "
123”) is executed to replace with variable display. Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbols (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode,
Second replacement to replace with a variable display that starts with the result mode calculated backward based on the game result, the remaining variable time (t16-t19, t26-t29, t36-t39), and the variable pattern (whether or not the reach state occurs, etc.) Execute the process.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 78 and 80, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 changes the variable display starting from "222" to the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t45, t55). A first replacement process is performed to replace the . Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t46, t
56), the game result and the remaining variable time (t46
~ t49, t56 ~ t59) and fluctuation patterns (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.) and the like, and a second replacement process is executed to replace with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward.
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing for replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times that the large pattern is replaced may be one time.
It is better to execute only replacement processing. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (or after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the large pattern ), the variable display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure variable display game is replaced with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement It is better to process. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decorative game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. If the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, when the high-speed variation of the large symbols ends, the large symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 are displayed in a desired reach mode (desired You may perform a replacement process to replace with a reach pattern).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 starts to fluctuate at high speed (starts fluctuating display) at the same time in the left area, the right area, and the middle area. At the same time as the region, the high-speed fluctuation ends (finishes the fluctuation display).
As shown in FIGS. 72, 74, 76, 78, and 80, the effect control device 300 is the second
In order to stop display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 82,
The identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 is displayed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29).
, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of small symbols,
It is configured to perform a third replacement process of replacing the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 41).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. In the case of replacing the small symbols at a timing other than the end of the high-speed variation of the small symbols, a first replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode. A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed when the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols ends.
Further, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the small symbols, either the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols is performed after the first replacement processing, or the small symbols are replaced at high speed. It is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time, or may be multiple times. If the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Further, when the number of times of replacing the small symbols is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (eg, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (eg, t23 to t
24, t33-t34, t43-t44, t53-t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (eg, t24 to t25,
t34-t35, t44-t45, t54-t55) are the same.
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t15 to t16) and "not matched" (eg, t25 to t16).
t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched" (for example, t26 to
t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t17 to t18) and "not matched" (eg, t2
7 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the fluctuation time is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t28 to t29
, t38-t39, t48-t49, t58-t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation, and the time from the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation, the time from the start of the large pattern temporary stop display to the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation, and the large pattern reach By making the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "if it is consistent" and "if it is not consistent", start the fluctuation display in an inconsistent state It is possible to set the variation time for the case of the display to be the same as the variation time for the case where the variation display is started in the matching state. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special game state when the state is set, and is a first variable display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition (a prize in a start winning port 36) among the start conditions as a variable display game. First variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variation display game), and establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions as a variation display game (to normal variation winning device 37 Control the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means and the second variable display means Corresponding to the game control means (game control device 100) and the variable display game, the identification pattern (
A performance display means capable of displaying a first decoration game for variably displaying a large pattern) and a second decoration game for variably displaying an identification pattern (small pattern) corresponding to the variable display game and smaller than the first decoration game. (Display device 41) and production control means for controlling production display means (production control device 300)
and, when executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game, the second variable display game
At the start of the variable display game, the result mode statically displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) statically displayed on the effect display means are different. There are cases where they do not match, and in that case, the game control means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game without performing processing to make these result modes match. The effect control means is configured to start variable display of identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 73 and 77). reference).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41),
When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) does not match, it corresponds to the second variable display game and the second variable display game in the state of not matching. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are performed in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the match is not made, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the special game state that occurred, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode ("loss" result mode) And, the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is 0, and the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) The number of starting memory (second starting memory) to be the execution right is one or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100), after the end of the special game state, the second From a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300)
After the end of the special game state, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. (See FIGS. 73 and 77).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41)
is a winning pattern, and the stopped pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. .

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 79).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. pattern, and when the stop pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode is ended is not limited to the "win" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of "big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "minor win" among the result modes of "hit". It may be only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, only the result mode of the "10R jackpot" among the result modes of the "hit" may be used.
It may be only the result mode of "7R hit", or "2R hit" among the result modes of "hit".
It may be only the result mode of.

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300), in a state in which the starting memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stored, It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the second starting memory number is 1 or greater, the first starting memory number is 0.
It does not have to be 1 (that is, the number of first starting memories may be 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of the second starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the first starting memory number must be greater than or equal to one and the second starting memory number must be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of second starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the second starting memory number should be greater than or equal to one and the first starting memory number should be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) (
The number of first starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is 1 or more It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the number of first start memories is one or more, the number of second start memories does not have to be zero (that is, the number of second start memories may be one or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) became the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
The number of the first starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display (the other of the games) may be executed in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is possible to configure so that the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed in the order in which it is stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more. and the case where the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game, and in these cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means changes the display of the identification information in the second variable display game from the state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode. and start
After the end of the special game state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to initiate a floating display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. If the stopped symbol on the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the A low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are identifiable and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify are convertible, and the variation display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game is possible. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means at the start of the second variation display game and the effect display. If the result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16), and if not consistent (t24 to t26, t3
4 to t36, t44 to t46, and t54 to 56).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large pattern) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "when matching" and "when not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the The identification pattern can be converted into a difficult-to-identify high-speed change display mode, and after the start of the change display of the identification pattern in the second decoration game corresponding to the second change-display game, the change display is performed through the high-speed change display mode. Time until completion (t14-t19, t24-t29, t
34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59) are the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the second variable displayed on the effect display means at the start of the second variable display game. The result mode of the decoration game is configured to be the same between when (t14 to t19) is consistent and when it is not (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59). be able to.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "when matching" and "when not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed are displayed. There may be a mode in which decoration games are not displayed.

Also, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
For example, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game, and a decoration special figure corresponding to the main variation (special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state) In a gaming machine that displays only a variable display game and does not display a decorative special variable display game that corresponds to an irregular variation (a special variable display game that is determined not to be the main variation in each gaming state), the main variation is switched. At the start of the first special figure variation display game, there is a case where the stop design of the display device 41 and the stop design of the batch display device 50 do not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed for the first time, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 There is a case where it is not consistent with the stop pattern. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50
There are times when it is not consistent with the stop pattern of. In that case, in an inconsistent state,
The variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, the game machine is capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the main variation provided in the display area of the display device 41 is a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation. In the gaming machine that displays on the display unit and displays the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the irregular variation on the irregular variation display unit provided in the display area of the display device 41, the main variation is switched and the first feature At the start of the figure variation display game, the stop symbols on the main variation display portion of the display device 41 and the stop symbols on the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when switching from the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, in the second game state At the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed for the first time, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 may not match. . In that case, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.

Also, when switching from the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, it is executed first in the first game state At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop pattern of the main variation display part of the display device 41 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 may not match. In that case, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is started while remaining in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 81, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a hitting ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.
flow down.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to approximately the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 for forming a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball passing through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting prize opening 36, the stage portion 620
The game ball rolling on the top is likely to enter the first starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board presentation device 44 having a movable member and a light-emitting member, and performing game presentation by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light-emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is a first start winning port 36 (first start winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 82). In the game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening.

A general prize winning port 35 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the left of the first start prize winning port 36 . Winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 82). In addition, in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and in the game area 32 below the center case 40 and to the right of the first start winning opening 36, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is also detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 82).

As shown in FIG. 81 , a normal symbol start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the upper part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal figure start gate 34,
A gate switch 34a (Fig. 8
2) is provided. A game ball driven into the game area 32 is normal figure starting gate 34
, the normal pattern variation display game is executed. Below the normal figure starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35 is provided. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this general winning hole 35 .

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted between a state where game balls are not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. ) 38 are provided. The first special variable winning device 38 includes an opening/closing member 38c
tilts to the right around the lower end to transform the upper big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The first special variable prize winning device 38 converts the closed state in which the upper special prize winning port is closed to the open state according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the inflow of game balls into the upper special prize winning port. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball winning the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 82).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 82) is provided with a lever member actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 82) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. Occurs (in this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state).
A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Further, inside the upper grand prize winning port, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 82) for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 3
By matching the number of game balls detected in 8e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (first start winning area) that gives the starting condition of the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) is provided. ing. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 82). The normal variable winning device 37 is provided with a plate-shaped movable member 37b that can slide back and forth. unfavorable condition). Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retreated backward by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 82) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is played. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which balls can easily flow in.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by sliding back and forth in the forward and backward direction by the normal electric solenoid 37c. The movable member of the device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type normal electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls forward by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or the normal electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape by opening. Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of this normal variable winning device 37 . The flow path on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30a for recovering game balls that do not win, such as a winning port. Also, the left channel of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates with the lower part of the game area 32 .
In the right part of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a second start winning opening 97 that gives the starting condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) (Second startup winning area) is provided. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 82).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36 and to the left of the second starting winning opening 97, there is a state where game balls are not accepted due to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A second special variable prize winning device (lower grand prize winning opening) 39 is provided that can be converted to a state of easy acceptance. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower big winning opening into a state in which game balls can flow in by moving the opening/closing member 39c back and forth (sliding). The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is
It is detected by the big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 82). The game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate that allows the game area 32 to be seen through.
In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower left part of the game board main body 80, a package for executing a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a general figure fluctuation display game A display device 50 is provided.

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variation winning device 37 is not the second start winning area that gives the start condition of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game), but the special figure 1 variation The point that it is the first start winning area that gives the starting condition of the display game (first special figure fluctuation display game), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) below the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37
The first point is that a second start winning opening 97 (second starting winning area) is provided to give the start condition of
It differs from the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 3) of the embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 82, the game control device 100 of the present embodiment has an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 connected to the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97. It differs from the game control device 100 (see FIG. 5) of one embodiment.

FIG. 83 shows an example of distribution ratios in this embodiment.
In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the same random numbers as those used in the big-hit determination (big-hit lottery) are used to perform small-hit determination (small-hit lottery) and supporter-hit determination (supporter-hit lottery). i.e.
In this embodiment, a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination are performed using a big hit random number (
FIG. 83 (a) reference), and when the determination result is a big hit, stop design information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 83 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit In, stop design information corresponding to the special design random number is acquired (see FIG. 83 (c)), and if the determination result is a hit, the stop design information corresponding to the special design random number is acquired ( (see FIG. 83(d)), if the determination result is neither, the lost stop symbol information is acquired. In addition, the support hit may be derived only when the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), or the state without general electric support (normal game state ST24, first The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST21), or may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST24 (low probability no support).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
It is a figure which illustrates.
The game state includes a normal game state ST24, a first specific game state ST21, a second specific game state ST22, and a third specific game state ST23. In addition to this, as a game state, the first special result (
There are a first special game state (big hit game state) based on the big hit) and a second special game state (small hit game state) based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the first special result (jackpot) to be controlled by the game control device 100
is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game by being controlled by the production control device 300, the main start area that is the start area that should be mainly aimed in the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed The main variation special figure, which is the type of, and the shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the first starting winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning port 97 by hitting right. It is possible. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Also, in the present embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability of becoming a small hit (second special result),
Special figure 2 is higher than special figure 1.

The normal game state ST24 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first start winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation, and the special figure 2
It is designed to make fluctuation display games irregular fluctuations. This normal game state ST
24, a very long variable time is set for the special figure 2 variable display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST24. .

The first specific game state ST21 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but special figure variable display. There is a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game and the normal figure fluctuation display game. again,
A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the variable time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST24. Playing the two-variation display game is more advantageous for the player. Since the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small win than the special figure 1 variation display game, and the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of a big win, the small win is high in this first specific game state ST21. It occurs with frequency and the number of balls held by the player increases. Since small hits occur with high frequency in this way, the production mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electric support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this second specific game state ST22, the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game becomes shorter than in the case of the normal game state ST24. It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Among these four game states, the normal game state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST24 because of the general power support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so the normal game state ST24 and the third game state ST23 This state is more advantageous for the player than the specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a high-probability state, and since it is a state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits, the normal game state ST24 and the second specific game state ST2
This state is more advantageous for the player than ST2 or the third specific game state ST23.
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 83(b), there are two types of jackpots in the special figure 1 variation display game, the probability variable A jackpot and the normal jackpot. There are three types of jackpots: probability variable A jackpot, probability variable B jackpot, and normal jackpot.

The transition of the game state is the end of the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result (jackpot),
It is done by deriving per support and digesting the prescribed number of games. Therefore, the game state does not shift due to the end of the second special game state based on the derivation of the second special result (minor win).
Basically, when the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot with a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST23, and the special Of the probability variable jackpots that are set to a high probability state after the end of the game state, if the probability variable A jackpot is selected, the process shifts to a second specific game state ST22, and if the probability variable B jackpot is selected, the shift is shifted to the first specific game state ST21. .

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and becomes a special game state, and there is V passage in the special game state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (
When the game ball flows into the probability variable operation area) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), it shifts to the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a probability variable B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and in the special game state V
In the case of passing (when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, the first
It shifts to specific game state ST21. Also, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is no V passage in the special game state does not flow), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the third specific game state ST23. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 are set to the same chance mode in the performance mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp the shift.

In addition, the number of ST times (for example, 20
00 times), and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the first specific game state ST21 reaches the ST number of times, the game is shifted to the normal game state ST24. Also good.
Also, the number of ST times (for example, 20
00 times), and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST22 reaches the ST number, the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game It is also possible to shift to state ST23).
Also, in FIG. 84, the transition of the game state when a big hit is derived as a result of irregular variation is omitted. Specifically, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 84, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) A variable probability B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and if there is V passage in the special game state (a game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch 38d If it is detected), after the end of the special game state, the transition to the first specific game state ST21.

When the normal jackpot is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the specific game state ST23, the game shifts to a normal game state ST24. That is, in this embodiment, the normal jackpot support count is set to "100". It should be noted that the number of times the normal jackpot is supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

Also, when the probability variable jackpot A is derived and the state shifts to the second specific game state ST22, 10
It is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game is executed 00 times, and the special figure is performed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit in the second specific game state ST22. When the variable display game is executed, the game moves to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in this embodiment, the number of support times of the probability variable A jackpot is "1000 times"
is set to In addition, the number of support times for the probability A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times",
It can be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be "until the next big hit or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the game state is also performed by derivation of the support win.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, the third specific game state Move to ST23. In addition, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when the support win is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to That is, the transition (transition) of the game state when the probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot is derived passes through the special game state, whereas the transition (transition) of the game state when the support hit is derived
does not go through the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (no support with a high probability), if the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, after the special figure variation display game ends, the special game state is changed. Second specific game state S without going through
You can shift to T22 (with high probability support).

When the support hit A out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the third specific game is performed until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22) 50 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit. When the special figure fluctuation display game is executed,
It shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support A is set to "50 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support A is not limited to "50 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST2
In 2), when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support per support B is set to "100 times". It should be noted that the number of times of support per support B is not limited to "100 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit C out of the support hits is derived and the state shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in 3 specific game state ST23 (or second specific game state ST22), and the third specific game state ST23 (or second specific game state ST
In 22), when the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving a big hit or a support hit, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times of support per support C is set to "1000 times". Note that the number of times of support per support C is not limited to "1000 times", and can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electricity support), that is, the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23. If so, the number of times of support is reset, and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is set again (see FIG. 10). Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the presentation mode is changed in accordance with the change in the number of remaining support times. It should be noted that it is not necessary to change the presentation mode in response to the change in the number of remaining support times. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count (Fig. 11 (a) )reference). In this case, the maximum number of support times (for example, 1000
times), and if the sum of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to the new support hit exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of support times may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Also, in this case, the rendering mode may or may not be changed in accordance with the change in the remaining support count. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the general electric support), the remaining support count and the support count corresponding to the new support hit are compared, and the larger one (advantageous for the player) method) may be employed (FIG. 11(b)). In this case,
The presentation mode may or may not be changed according to the change in the number of remaining support times. Alternatively, only the rank-up of the performance mode may be permitted, and the performance mode switching such as the rank-down may not be performed. Furthermore, when the number of times of support corresponding to the new support win is not adopted, the support win symbols may be displayed on the display device 41 as the game result, or the losing symbols may be displayed instead of the support win symbols as the game result. It may be displayed on the display device 41 .

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by shooting game balls (pachinko balls) toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The game ball that is launched is
It flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the normal figure start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the first starting winning opening 36. , normal variable winning device 37, second start winning port 97, first special variable winning device 38 or second
Winning the special variable winning device 39 or flowing into the out port 30 a and discharged from the game area 32 . When the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning port 97, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the player wins. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 82).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34 by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), and the normal figure start gate 34 The general winning prize port 35, the normal variable winning device 37, the second start winning port 97, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, the second special variable winning device 39 Players can aim to win a prize through the general prize-winning port 35 arranged on the left side.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal map start memory in the RAM 111C. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100, as a process of executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern display unit provided in the collective display device 50, predetermined multiple lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time is determined in advance. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order shown, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. In addition, the normal figure display unit of the batch display device 50 is composed of the display device 41, and as the normal identification information, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are used, and after this is displayed variably for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured to display.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the lighting pattern as a special result mode, and operates the general electric solenoid 37c,
Control is performed to open the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the result on the general pattern display section of the collective display device 50 .

In addition, the winning balls to the first start winning opening 36, the winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning balls to the second starting winning opening 97 are respectively provided inside the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2.
It is detected by switch 37a and start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 3
Based on the winning to 7, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and the second starting winning port 97 Start based on the winning Memory(
A second start memory that forms a special figure start memory) is stored within a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces).
Based on the winning to the first starting winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and the second starting winning opening 97, a jackpot random number value, a special pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, The extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as the first starting memory and the second starting memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is displayed on the first memory display unit (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 At the same time, it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 display (first variation display device) of the collective display device 50 based on the first start memory, and the collective display device based on the second start memory. A special figure 2 variation display game is performed with 50 special figure 2 indicators (second variation display devices). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (big hit). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during the execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 (first start winning region) or normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning region) It constitutes a first execution control means for controlling the execution of one variation display game (first special figure variation display game). In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area) a second execution control means for controlling the execution of

In the special figure 1 indicator and the special figure 2 indicator of the collective display device 50, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device becomes a special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result and the big hit. Then, it becomes the first special game state (so-called jackpot state). Also, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 indicator or the special figure 2
The display mode of the display becomes a special result mode (minor win result mode) corresponding to the second special result, becomes a small win, and enters a second special game state (so-called small win state). That is, the special figure 1 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning port 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 constitutes a first variable display means. In addition, the special figure 2 display device of the collective display device 50 can display the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 second variation display means form.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible to do That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variation display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 indicator and the special figure 2 indicator of the collective display device 50 at 0.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game has a higher probability of a small hit, but in the normal game state with a low probability, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is the variation time. A very long (approximately 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, special figure 2 in the normal game state
The execution of the variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting to the left and aiming at the first start winning opening 36. - 特許庁The long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be awarded, and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST24, first specific game state ST21) are specified. Game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23)
and a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state, and the game state control means determines that the result of the game is a predetermined result (in this embodiment, a normal jackpot or In the case of a probability variable A jackpot), it is possible to generate a specific game state after generating a special game state, and if the result of the game is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, a special It is configured so that a specific game state can be generated without generating a game state (see FIG. 84).

Therefore, since the specific game state (general electric support) occurs with a predetermined probability until the special game state occurs, it is possible to suppress the amount of money used by the player and suppress the reduction speed of the balls held. becomes possible, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, since the specific game state (general electric support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (normal support) occurs frequently, there is a risk that gambling will become too high. When the game state (general electric support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the number of balls released in the special game state accordingly. Therefore, even if the specific game state (universal electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling nature does not become too high, and furthermore, it is possible to moderate the waves of the winning balls.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is such that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) in the case of a support win). (game control device 100), and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means resets the specific game period being set to correspond to the specific result. The period can be configured to be resettable (Fig. 10
reference).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of times of support) Since it is possible to extend the time, the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is such that the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) in the case of a support win). (game control device 100), and the setting means adds a period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period when the result of the game becomes the specific result during occurrence of the specific game state. The period can be configured so that it can be reset as a specific game period (see FIG. 11(a)).
By configuring in this way, when the specific result (support hit) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (support number) Since it will be extended, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) that executes effects related to the game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means, after the special game state occurs Occurred specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST2
3) and a specific game state that occurred without the occurrence of a special game state (second specific game state ST22,
3rd specific game state ST23) and, it is possible to make the production possible.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23).
In addition, the specific game state that occurred after the special game state occurred (second specific game state ST22
, 3rd specific game state ST23) and a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23) in which the special game state does not occur. can be Thereby, whether it is a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (jackpot), or a specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (support hit) Since it is possible to suggest whether it is in the state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the specific game state that occurred after the special game state (second specific game state ST22
, 3rd specific game state ST23) and the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23) in which the special game state does not occur, the production of the same mode is executed. can be
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state ( When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same between the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same mode of presentation may be executed. That is, for example, the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot corresponding to the number of support times of 100 (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) and the corresponding number of support times of 100 times. Support hit (support hit B in the case of this embodiment)
may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of .

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the game ball shooting direction that is advantageous for the player. When this happens, it is possible to configure so as to start instructing the shooting direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the current game (see FIGS. 43 and 48).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately indicate the direction in which the game ball is to be shot, thereby improving the interest in the game.
Of course, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment also has the effect (the result is "support win") exemplified in the first embodiment.
It is possible to execute a special effect performed during the special figure fluctuation display game, an additional effect performed after the special figure fluctuation display game whose result is "sapo hit", etc.). Further, in the present embodiment, the modifications of the first embodiment ([Modification 1 of support hit determination] to [Modification 5 of support hit determination], [Other modification 1] to [Other modification 11 ] etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

[Support number notification production]
In each embodiment, as described in [Other Modification 8], before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game), the support number notification effect is started. You can
However, during the variable time of the support game, it is not possible to clearly inform the number of times of support given this time. In other words, after the start of the stop display time of the support winning game, the number of support times to be given this time can be clearly notified, whereas before the start of the stop display time of the support win game, cannot be clearly stated. Therefore, when starting the support number notification effect before the start of the stop display time of the support per game,
At first, the support number of times notification effect is executed in an unclear manner, and thereafter, at a predetermined timing after the start of the stop display time, the support number of times notification effect mode is switched from the unclear condition to the clear condition. It is assumed that

A clear mode is, for example, a mode of displaying "support 20 times" (Fig. 42(g), etc.) or a mode of displaying "remaining 20 times" when the number of times of support given this time is 20 times. (Fig. 45
(c) etc.).
In addition, the ambiguous mode means "support", "remainder", and "times" that can be used in the clear mode.
This is a mode in which display such as "20" is omitted.
0 GET” is displayed. Alternatively, a mode in which the number of times is replaced by a different unit (for example, a mode in which "20pt" is displayed or a mode in which "20pt GET" is displayed) may be used.
Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(c), "20 support times?" , the aspect with an exclamation point may be defined as a clear aspect. Therefore, in FIG.
It can be said that the support number informing effect starts before the start of the stop display time of the support winning game, and at the start of the stop display time, the mode of the support number informing effect switches from an unclear mode to a clear mode.

FIG. 85 and FIG. 86(a) show a case in which the effect for notifying the number of supporters is started during the temporary stop display of the result of the support winning game. FIG. 85 is an example of display on the display device 41, and FIG. 86(a) is an example of a timing chart. Since FIGS. 85(a) to (e) show the same states as FIGS. 42(a) to (e), description thereof will be omitted.
When it is reported that the result of the battle production is a "tie", as shown in FIG. 85(f), after the reach fluctuation (for example, the SP reach fluctuation), a temporary stop display of the support symbol (support hit symbol) starts. (t81). Here, since the game result is "support hit A", support hit A
A symbol "434" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85(g), during the temporary stop display of the support win symbol, the support number informing effect starts (t82). Since it is during the variable time during the temporary stop display, the support number notification effect is started in an unclear manner. Here, since the game result is "support win A" and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20, the number of times of support is 2 as the support times notification effect.
An effect for indefinitely notifying that the number of times is 0 (for example, an effect for displaying a support number suggesting image 88 written as "20 GET!!") is executed.

Next, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 85(h),
The stop display of the support symbol (support winning symbol) starts (t83). Here, the game result is "
Since it is a support win A", "434", which is a support win A symbol, is stopped and displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 85(h), when the stop display time starts, the mode of the support number notification effect switches from the unclear mode to the clear mode. Here, an effect that clearly indicates that the number of times of support is 20 is changed from an effect that clearly indicates that the number of times of support is 20 (for example, an effect that displays "20 times of support" on the number of times of support display 86). is switched to
That is, the support frequency notification effect makes a notification effect of suggesting or notifying information about the specific game state (general electric support). For example, among the aspects of the support number notification production, the unclear aspect is "
"Suggestion", and a clear mode corresponds to "Notification". Further, the number of times of support corresponds to information about a specific game state.

Then, when the stop display time ends, the next variation time of the special figure variation display game starts (
t85). When the variable time starts, the chance mode (universal electric support) starts, and the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect start. In addition, the start timing of the chance mode notification effect is not at the start of the chance mode, but after the start of the chance mode (for example, at the start of the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed first after shifting to the chance mode). can be Also, the start timing of the right-handed instruction production is not at the start of the chance mode,
It may be after the start of the chance mode. During the chance mode, every time the special figure variation display game is started, the remaining number of supports is notified in the support number notification effect.

In this way, before the start of the stop display time of the support game (during the variable time of the support game)
By starting the support number informing effect at , it is possible to secure a sufficient time for informing the player of the support number.
It is also possible to start the support number informing effect after the start of the stop display time of the support winning game. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(b), during the stop display time of the support winning game (t84), it is possible to start the support number notification effect, and for example, as shown in FIGS. At the start of the stop display time of the support winning game (t66, t76), it is also possible to start the support number informing effect. However, if the support number notification effect is started after the start of the stop display time of the support game, in order to secure a sufficient time as the time to notify the support number, the stop display time of the support game It may be necessary to set longer than the stop display time of the special figure fluctuation display game other than. On the other hand, by starting the performance for informing the number of supporters before the start of the stop display time of the supporter win game, even if the stop display time of the supporter win game is short, the time for notifying the number of supporters to the player is sufficiently secured. Since it becomes possible, a smooth game becomes possible.

As described above, the identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the support per pattern may be composed of only general patterns (symbols 1 to 9), or may be composed of general patterns and special patterns (special support patterns). Designs) may be configured, or may be configured only from special designs. That is, the support winning symbols temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG.
) may consist of general symbols and special symbols, or may consist of only special symbols. Also, the support winning symbols stop-displayed in the first decorative game display section 81 may consist of only general symbols as shown in FIG. It may consist of a general design and a special design, or it may consist of only a special design. The same applies to FIGS. 87 and 88 to be described later.

Moreover, in FIG.42(a) and FIG.85(a), the decoration special figure starting memory display in the left end of the memory|storage display part 83 during standby is displayed by the specific display mode different from a normal display mode. That is, the pending change effect suggesting the look-ahead result is executed in the standby storage display section 83 . Here, the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is a support winning game, which is suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display. It is
Of course, the pending change effect for the starting memory corresponding to the support game can be performed across multiple variations (multiple special figure variation display games). That is, in a state where the starting memory stored prior to the starting memory corresponding to the support winning game is not digested, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the support winning game is displayed in a specific display mode, and the support winning game is displayed. The specific display mode may be continued until the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to is hidden (for example, until the support game ends). Further, when there are a plurality of types of the specific display mode, the type of the specific display mode may change (for example, change from the first specific display mode to the second specific display mode) while the specific display mode continues. is also possible.

In addition, the support number notification effect is not only when moving to the chance mode (general electric support) without going through the special game state, but also when the chance mode (general electric support) passes through the special game state
It is also feasible when migrating to That is, the support number informing effect can be executed not only when the support win is derived, but also when the big win is derived.
FIG. 86(c) shows an example of a timing chart in the case of executing the support number notification effect when shifting to the chance mode via the special game state.

As shown in FIG. 86(c), on the display device 41, reach fluctuation (for example, SP reach fluctuation)
, the temporary stop display of the jackpot symbols, and the stop display of the jackpot symbols are executed, and when the stop display time ends, the first special game state starts (t91). In the first special game state, the display device 41 or the like executes a big win fanfare effect, a big win round effect (and interval effect), and a big win ending effect. Further, when shifting to the chance mode after the end of the first special game state, during the first special game state (for example, during the ending effect), the number of support times notification effect is started (t92). Since it is not during the variable time during the special game state, the support number notification performance is started in a clear manner. Specifically, during the special game state, as a support number notification effect, an effect that clearly informs the support number (for example, the support number display unit 86 displays "
100 times of support”) is executed.

After that, when the ending time of the big hit ends, the first special game state ends, and the next variation time of the special figure variation display game starts (t93). When the variable time starts, the chance mode (universal electric support) starts, and the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect start. Also in this case, the start timing of the chance mode notification effect and/or the right-handed instruction effect is after the start of the chance mode (for example, at the start of the change display of the special figure change display game that is executed first after shifting to the chance mode) ) may be During the chance mode, every time the special figure variation display game is started, the remaining number of supports is notified in the support number notification effect.

In this embodiment, when shifting to the chance mode without going through the special game state (Fig. 86
In (a), (b)), the period K1 from the start of the support number notification effect (t82, t84) to the start of the chance mode (t85) is the transition to the chance mode via the special game state (Fig. In 86(c)), the length is set to be different from the period K2 from the start of the support number notification effect (t92) to the start of the chance mode (t93).
In this way, in a game machine that has two types of routes for transitioning to the chance mode (general electric support), i.e., a route that does not go through the special game state and a route that goes through the special game state, the period K1 , K2 have different lengths, the player can choose the period K1
, K2, to easily grasp which route the shift to the chance mode takes (that is, whether the result of the game that triggered the shift to the chance mode is a win or a big win). becomes possible.

Also, when shifting to the chance mode without going through the special game state (Fig. 86 (a), (b
)), the start timing of the support number notification effect is set during the special figure variation display game (between the start of the variation time and the end of the stop display time). On the other hand, when shifting to the chance mode via the special game state (Fig. 86 (c)), the start timing of the support number notification effect is during the special game state (from the start of the fanfare time to the end of the ending time). between). That is, the game state at the time of starting the support number informing effect differs depending on whether the special game state is not passed or not. Therefore, the player
Depending on the game state when the number-of-supports notification effect starts, which route is taken to shift to the chance mode (that is, whether the game result that triggered the shift to the chance mode is a win or a big win). can be easily grasped.

In addition, the effect control device 300 can execute a fanning effect related to the winning of the support in addition to the effect of notifying the number of times of support. The fanning effect related to the support win is, for example, a fanning effect for the support win that arouses the player’s expectation for the derivation of the support win, or promotion of the support win pattern (increasing the number of support). It is a support promotion agitation production that arouses the player's expectations.
FIG. 87 shows an example of a support performance and a promotion promotion performance. Figure 87 (a) to (c)
) is a diagram showing the same state as FIGS.
The sapo hit fan effect is executed during reach fluctuation (for example, SP reach fluctuation), for example, as shown in FIG. 87(d). Here, the first decoration game display section 8 is used as a fanning effect for the supporter.
In the medium fluctuation display area of 1, the identification information (here, "3") that establishes the support winning pattern and the identification information (here, "2") that does not establish the supporting winning pattern, the big winning pattern, or the small winning pattern. A performance is running.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", FIG. 87 (
As shown in e), the identification information that establishes the support winning pattern overwhelms the identification information that does not establish the supporting winning pattern, the big winning pattern, or the small winning pattern, and temporarily stops. As a result, the support winning symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "lost", the identification information that does not establish the support winning pattern, the big winning pattern, or the small winning pattern overcomes the identification information that establishes the supporting winning pattern. temporarily stop. As a result, the missing symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In addition, the support boost promotion effect is executed during the temporary stop display of the support win symbol, as shown in FIG. 87(g), for example.
Specifically, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 87(f), the support number informing effect is started during the temporary stop display of the support win symbol. In this case, the support win symbol displayed temporarily is the support win A symbol, and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win A" is 20 times, so the number of times of support is 20 times as the support times notification effect. A production that vaguely informs that the
0 GET! ! ” is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the support boost promotion effect is executed during the temporary stop display of the support win symbol. Here, as an effect to boost the supporter's promotion, a supporter winning A symbol ("434") and a supporter winning B symbol ("545") are pushed together in the first decoration game display section 81.
Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit B", FIG.
As shown in (h), the support hit B symbol overcomes the support hit A symbol and is temporarily stopped. As a result, the support hit B symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(h), the numerical value indicated in the support number suggesting image 88 changes, and the numerical value increases as shown in FIG. 87(i). In this case, the support win symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed is the support win B symbol, and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100.
Therefore, the support number notification effect changes from an effect that vaguely informs that the number of support is 20 times
0 GET! ! ” is promoted to an effect of displaying a support number suggesting image 88 written as “. As a result, a rank-up performance can be performed to make it look as if the number of supports has increased (added) during the variable time by using the number-of-supports informing performance, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Next, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 87(j),
As the stop display of the support win pattern is started, the mode of the support number informing effect is switched from the unclear mode to the clear mode.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit A", the support hit A symbol overcomes the support hit B symbol and is temporarily stopped. As a result, the support hit A symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again. Then, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, stop display of the support hit A symbol starts, and the mode of the support number informing effect is switched from the unclear mode to the clear mode.

In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit C", after the support hit B pattern beats the support hit A pattern (during the temporary stop display of the support hit B pattern) The support promotion inciting production is executed again. In that case, for example, as a support promotion promotion production, the support winning B symbol (“545”) and the support winning C symbol (“656”) push each other, and the support winning C symbol wins. The winning C symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, stop display of the C symbol for the support hit starts, and the mode of the support number informing effect is switched from the unclear mode to the clear mode.
Also, even if the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "Sapo hit B", after the support hit B pattern beats the support hit A pattern (during the temporary stop display of the support hit B pattern) You may perform the support promotion inciting production again. In that case, for example, as a support promotion inciting production, the support winning B symbol ("545") and the support winning C symbol ("656") are pushed against each other, and the support winning B symbol wins. The support hit B symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, the stop display of the support win B symbol starts, and the mode of the support number informing effect is switched from the unclear mode to the clear mode.

In this way, in the case of executing a supporter win sway effect in a special figure variation display game in which the result is "supporter win A", the supporter win A symbol is temporarily stopped or not as the supporter win sway effect. (See FIG. 87(d)) is executed.
In addition, in the case of executing a support hit sway effect in a special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "support hit B", the support hit A pattern will be temporarily stopped as the support hit effect (Fig. 87(d)), or an effect as to whether or not the B symbol for the support hit is temporarily stopped is executed. Which one is to be executed is selected, for example, when it is decided to execute the supporting performance.
In addition, in the case of executing a support hit sway effect in a special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "support hit C", the support hit A pattern will be temporarily stopped as the support hit effect (Fig. 87(d)), an effect as to whether or not the support winning B symbol is temporarily stopped, or an effect as to whether or not the support winning C symbol is to be temporarily stopped. Which one is to be executed is selected, for example, when it is decided to execute the supporting performance.

In addition, in the case of executing a supporter promotion boost effect in a special figure variation display game in which the result is "supporter win A", during the temporary stop display of the supporter win A pattern, the supporter win A symbol is displayed as the supporter promotion booster effect. And the sapo hit B pattern pushes each other and the sapo hit A pattern pushes and wins, and the sapo hit A
Either the pattern and the C pattern for the support hit push each other and the A pattern for the support hit wins. Which one is to be executed is selected, for example, when it is decided to execute the support promotion promotion effect.

In addition, in the case where the supporter promotion promotion effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "supporter hit B", and the pattern to be temporarily stopped is the supporter hit A pattern, the supporter win A pattern is provisional. During the stop display, as an effect to boost the promotion of the support, the support hit A pattern and the support hit B pattern push each other and the support hit B pattern wins, and the support hit A pattern and the support hit B pattern push each other and hit the support. After the B pattern wins, either of the performance that the supporter hit B pattern and the supporter hit C pattern push against each other and the supporter hit B pattern wins is executed. Which one is to be executed is selected, for example, when it is decided to execute the support promotion fanning effect.
In addition, in the case where the supporter promotion promotion effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "supporter hit B", and the pattern to be temporarily stopped is the supporter hit B pattern, the supporter hit B pattern is provisional. During the stop display, as the support promotion boosting effect, a support win B symbol and a support win C symbol push against each other and the support win B symbol wins.

In addition, in the case where the supporter promotion promotion effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "supporter hit C", and the pattern to be temporarily stopped is the supporter hit A pattern, the supporter win A pattern is provisional. During the stop display, as an effect to boost the promotion of the supporter, the supporter hit A pattern and the supporter hit B pattern push each other, and after the supporter hit B pattern pushes and wins, the supporter hit B pattern and the supporter hit C pattern push each other and hit the supporter C. One of the performance of the symbols pushing each other and the performance of the support hitting A pattern and the support hitting C pattern pushing each other and the support hitting C pattern pushing and winning is executed. Which one is to be executed is selected, for example, when it is decided to execute the support promotion fanning effect.
In addition, in the case where the supporter promotion promotion effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is "supporter hit C", and the pattern to be temporarily stopped is the supporter hit B pattern, the supporter win B pattern is provisional. During the stop display, as the support promotion boosting effect, a support win B symbol and a support win C symbol push against each other and the support win C symbol wins.

Also, in a special figure variation display game in which the result is "supporter win C", there is a case where the symbol to be temporarily stopped is a supporter win C symbol, but in that case, the supporter promotion boosting effect cannot be executed. That is, the maximum value of the number of times of support is 1000 times, and since the support win symbol to which this maximum value is assigned is the support win C symbol, it has a higher rank than the support win C symbol (the number of times of support assigned is large). There is no support pattern. Therefore, when the symbol to be temporarily stopped is the supporter win C symbol, the supporter win symbol cannot be promoted any more, so the supporter promotion boosting effect may not be executed.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not to execute a supporter winning inciting production or whether to execute a supporter promotion inciting production at the start of a supporter winning game, for example. Regardless of whether or not one of the support performance and the support promotion promotion performance is executed, the other may be executed, or when one is executed, the other may be executed without fail. However, if one is not executed, the other may be executed.
In addition, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not to execute the support win fan effect even at the start of the special figure variation display game other than the support win game. Specifically, for example, even at the start of a special figure variation display game in which the result is "lost" and reach variation (for example, SP reach variation) occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the support hit effect. be done. At that time, a pattern of whether or not the support hit A symbol is temporarily stopped, a pattern of whether or not the support hit B symbol is temporarily stopped,
It is also possible to select which one of the three types of patterns, ie, the pattern of whether or not the support hit C symbol is temporarily stopped, is executed. If the result is "loss", no matter which pattern is selected, the winning symbols are not temporarily stopped, but the losing symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 87, for the sake of convenience, illustration of special effects such as battle effects executed during reach fluctuation (for example, SP reach fluctuation) is omitted, but during reach fluctuation, Alternatively, the special performance may not be executed in the case of executing the supporting performance. When executing a special effect in parallel with the support hit effect,
At least a part of the display area for the special effect may be overlapped with the display area for the support win effect (for example, the middle variable display area of the first decoration game display section 81). It may be designed so that it does not overlap with the display area of the support hitting effect.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 87, for example, as shown in FIG. (including the display mode of the numerical value written in the support number suggesting image 88) and the display position of the support number suggesting image 88 are changed. In addition, in FIGS. 87(g) and (h), the display area of the support number notification effect (the display area of the support number suggesting image 88) is entirely the display area of the support promotion boosting effect (the first decorative game display section 81). ), but at least a part of it may overlap with the display area of the promotion promotion effect.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 87, along with the support promotion promotion production, the rank-up production (FIGS. The up effect can be executed even when the support promotion inciting effect is not performed.
FIG. 88 shows an example of a rank-up effect that is executed when the support boost promotion effect is not performed. FIGS. 88(a) to (e) show that "767", which is a stop pattern (common symbol for support win) common to "support win A", "support win B", and "support win C", is temporarily stopped. is FIG. 42(b) ~
Since it is a diagram showing the same state as (f), its description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88(f), during the temporary stop display of the support win symbol, the support number notification effect starts. In this case, the game result is "support win B", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. (For example, an effect of displaying a support number suggesting image 88 written as "20 GET!!") is being executed.
After that, as shown in FIGS. 88(g) and (h), each time the production button 25 is pressed, the suggested number of support (numerical value indicated in the support number suggesting image 88) increases. .
As a result, it is possible to make it look as if the number of support times has increased (added) during the variable time by using the support number notification effect, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Since the maximum number of times of support that can actually be given is 1000 times, when the suggested number of times of support is 1000 times, the number of times of support cannot be increased any more.
Therefore, when the production button 25 is pressed while the suggested number of times of support is the maximum value, the number of times of support (the number of times of support indicated in the image 88 suggesting the number of times of support is indicated as shown in FIG. numerical value) is maintained, and the display mode of the support number suggesting image 88 is changed. Although the color of the support number suggesting image 88 is changed in FIG. The font, color, size, etc. of the numerical values may be changed.

Then, when the variable time ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 88(j),
As the stop display of the support win pattern is started, the mode of the support number informing effect is switched from the unclear mode to the clear mode. Here, since the game result is "support win B" and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times, the effect that the number of times of support is 1000 times is not clear. It is switched to a production that clearly informs that it is 100 times. In this way, if the suggested number of support (the number of support indicated by the unclear support number notification effect) is different from the actual support number, the clear support number notification effect does not actually The number of times of support to be given is indicated. Therefore, for example, in the case where the game result is "support win B", the suggested number of support times is 20 without pressing the effect button 25 (the numerical value indicated in the support number suggestion image 88 is 20). When the variable time ends in this state, the performance of indefinitely informing that the number of times of support is 20 times is switched to the performance of clearly informing that the number of times of support is 100 times.

In addition, in the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 88, the number of support suggested first is the minimum value (20 times) of the number of support that can actually be given, but the number of support suggested first is other than the minimum value (100 times). or 1000 times). When the number of times of support initially suggested is the maximum value (1000 times), the number of times of support cannot be increased any more. The display mode of the suggestive image 88 is changed.

Specifically, for example, when the number of times of support suggested first is 20, the production button 2
When 5 is pressed three times, the numerical value displayed in the support number suggesting image 88 is changed from 20 to 10.
It changes from 0→1000→1000.
Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed three times when the number of times of support initially suggested is 100, the numerical value displayed in the number of times of support suggestion image 88 is 100→1000→10.
It changes from 00 to 1000.
Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed three times when the number of times of support initially suggested is 1000 times, the numerical value displayed in the number of times of support suggestion image 88 is changed from 1000→1000→
It changes from 1000 to 1000.
The number of times of support suggested first may be fixed, or the number of times of support suggested first may be selected when determining the execution of the rank-up effect.

Of course, the number of times the effect button 25 is pressed in the rank-up effect is not limited to three times. Also, at the start of the rank-up effect or the like, an operation prompting effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 25 may be executed.
In addition, in the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 88, the number of support that can actually be given (20 times,
100 times and 1000 times), but other times (e.g. 10 times and 50 times)
times) may also be used. Specifically, for example, the number of times of support suggested first is 10 times, and the number of times of support suggested is 10 times→20 times→50 times→80 times→100 times→200 times→
. . , and may be increased.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, the number of times of first suggested support is displayed before the effect button 25 is pressed. You may make it display. That is, the rank-up effect may be started when the effect button 25 is pressed, and then the rank may be increased each time the effect button 25 is pressed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the game result is "support win B", and the number of times of support corresponding to "support win B" is 100 times. It will suggest a higher number of support than the number of support given to. Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed in a state in which the suggested support count matches the actual support count, as shown in FIGS. 88(k) and (l), for example,
The number of times of support (the numerical value indicated in the number of times of support suggestion image 88) may be maintained, and the display mode of the number of times of support suggestion image 88 may be changed. That is, instead of FIGS. 88(h) and (i), for example, FIGS. 88(k) and (l) may be executed.

When the production button 25 is pressed while the number of suggested support is the maximum value (or when the production button 25 is pressed while the number of suggested support matches the number of support actually given) case), the number of times of support may be maintained, and the display mode of the support number suggesting image 88 may not be changed.
However, in that case, even if the effect button 25 is pressed, the gaming machine does not respond, which causes inconveniences such as the player getting bored or misunderstanding that the effect button 25 is malfunctioning.
On the other hand, when the effect button 25 is pressed, instead of changing the display mode of the support number suggesting image 88, the effect by a movable member, the effect by sound, the effect by light, or the effect by display (support number suggesting image 88) is displayed. except for the change in the display mode), it is possible to avoid such inconvenience.

However, if the player executes an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, such as an effect using a movable member, the suggested number of supports is the chance mode support number that occurs after the end of the special game state (that is, a big win occurs). do). In addition, the player presses the effect button 25 in hopes that the support count will be ranked up (increased).
is pressed, the focus is on the support number suggesting image 88, and an effect by a movable member, a sound effect, a light effect, or a display effect (excluding changes in the display mode of the support number suggesting image 88) is executed. may not even notice it. When these effects are not noticed, it is the same as the case where the game machine does not react even if the effect button 25 is pressed. It is hard to say that inconveniences such as misunderstanding can be avoided with certainty.
Therefore, when the production button 25 is pressed while the suggested number of support is the maximum value (or when the production button 25 is pressed while the suggested support number matches the actual support number) 88 (i), (k
), as shown in (l), the number of times of support (the numerical value indicated in the image 88 suggesting the number of times of support)
is maintained, and the display mode of the support number suggesting image 88 is preferably changed. As a result, the player is neither bored nor misunderstood, so the amusement of the game is improved.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the number of times of support is ranked up (increased) when the effect button 25 is pressed. For example, triggered by the passage of a predetermined time (i.e. automatically),
You may make it rank up the number of times of support.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 88, the support win common symbol is temporarily stopped before the start of the rank-up effect (see FIG. 88(e)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "B win B", the B winning B symbol ("656") may be temporarily stopped before the rank-up effect is started. However, when the supporter win B symbol (“656”), which is a stop symbol unique to the “supporter win B”, is temporarily stopped and displayed, the player can grasp the number of support actually given before the rank-up effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a risk that the interest in the rank-up effect will decrease. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 88, by temporarily stopping and displaying the support winning common symbol ("767"), which is a stop symbol common to each "support winning", the stage before the execution of the rank-up effect. Then, since the number of support actually provided can be ambiguous, it is possible to improve the interest of the rank-up effect.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state to be provided, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game effect,
A normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning of a game ball is provided, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. (general electric support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a special result (jackpot), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game When the result is a specific result (sapo hit) different from the special result, it is possible to generate a specific game state without generating a special game state, and the effect control means, before starting the specific game state, It is possible to configure so as to execute a notification effect (support number notification effect) for suggesting or notifying information about the specific game state (see FIG. 86).
In addition, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives a game value to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a game state, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and starting by winning a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies a condition is provided, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state (general electric support) in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. , and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (jackpot) among the special results, a specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, a specific game state is generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means, before the start of the specific game state, the specific game It is possible to configure so as to execute a notification effect (support number notification effect) for suggesting or notifying information about the state (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state, and the interest in the game is improved.
Of course, even in a so-called type 1 + 2 gaming machine in which a special game state is generated by winning a prize in the specific area 38h, information about the specific game state is suggested or notified before the start of the specific game state (general electric support). It is possible to configure so as to execute a notification effect (support number notification effect).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives a game value to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a game state, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and starting by winning a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies a condition is provided, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state (general electric support) in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. , and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (jackpot) among the special results, a specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, a specific game state is generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means, before the start of the specific game state, the specific game A notification effect that suggests or notifies information about the state (support number notification effect) can be executed, and when the game result is a predetermined result or when the game result is a specific result, from the start of the notification effect It is possible to configure the periods K1 and K2 until the start of the specific game state to have different lengths (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the length of the period K2 from the start of the notification effect to the start of the specific game state when the game result is a predetermined result (big hit), and the length of the notification effect when the game result is a specific result (support hit) Since the length of the period K1 from the start to the start of the specific game state is different, depending on the length of the periods K1 and K2, the result of the game that triggered the transition to the specific game state (chance mode) is the predetermined result or the specific result. It becomes possible to easily grasp which of the two is, and the amusement of the game is improved.
The period K1 from the start of the notification effect to the start of the specific game state when the game result is a specific result (support hit) is from the start of the notification effect when the game result is a predetermined result (big hit). The period until the start of the specific game state may be shorter than or longer than the period K2. Alternatively, the period K1 from the start of the notification effect to the start of the specific game state when the game result is a specific result (support hit) is from the start of the notification effect when the game result is a predetermined result (big hit). It may be the same length as the period K2 until the start of the specific game state.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) in which the identification information is varied based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the player is asked to play a game. A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives value, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game and effect control means (performance control device 3) for controlling a game effect
00) and a normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is established by winning a game ball, and the game control means makes it easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal game state and the normal game state. A special game state (general electric support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, the special game state is generated. A specific game state is generated without any delay, and the effect control means can execute a notification effect (support number notification effect) that suggests or notifies information related to the specific game state while the identification information is changing (for example, during temporary stop display). (see Figure 86(a)).
Therefore, it is possible to secure enough time for informing the player of the information regarding the specific game state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the notification effect for suggesting or notifying information about the specific game state is not limited to the support times notification effect. That is, the information about the specific gaming state is not limited to the number of times of support (the number of time reduction fluctuations, the number of times of time reduction) and can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the notification effect for suggesting or announcing information about the specific game state may be a support-per-boosting effect (see FIG. 87(d)). In this case, it is possible to suggest or notify that "there is a possibility that a specific game state (general electric support) may occur" as information related to the specific game state.
In addition, the notification effect that suggests or notifies information about the specific game state is the support promotion fan effect (
(see FIG. 87(g)). In this case, as the information about the specific game state, "the support winning pattern is promoted (the support winning pattern to which a larger support number is assigned stops)"
It is possible to suggest or inform that there is a possibility.

In addition, in each embodiment, when the support hit is derived, the number of times of support corresponding to the type of support hit is set (steps A451, A491, A821), but this is not the only option. It is also possible to set the number of times of support corresponding to the number of times (so-called number of times of getting stuck) derived by
Specifically, for example, the game control device 100 is provided with a consecutive execution number counter that counts the number of consecutive executions of a losing game (a special figure variation display game in which the result is "loss"). Then, when the support hit is derived, the value of the continuous execution counter is the first value (
For example, if it is less than 300), set the first number of support times (for example, 100 times), and if the value of the continuous execution counter is equal to or greater than the first value and less than the second value For example, 200 times) is set, and if the value of the continuous execution counter is equal to or greater than the second value, the third number of times (for example, until the next big win) is set.

By configuring in this way, the number of times of support in the chance mode (universal electric support) can be determined according to the value of the consecutive execution number counter. Therefore, for example, the greater the value of the consecutive execution counter, the more times the support can be given.
If the number of times of support is not determined according to the type of support hit, as in the case of such a configuration, the number of types of support hit may be one. That is, the support winning pattern may be of one kind.
Of course, it is also possible to adopt this configuration for a gaming machine in which the support hit is derived only in the normal mode. Since the number of times of support for support) can be determined, there is no sense of unfairness, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the number of consecutive executions counter is not limited to counting the number of consecutive executions of losing games. It may count the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game in which the is "support hit") is continuously executed, or a game that does not generate the first special game state (special figure in which the result is "lost" A variation display game, a special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit", and a special figure variation display game whose result is "minor hit") may be counted.

Further, the value of the continuous execution number counter may be used as a trigger for transition to the specific game state (general electric support) instead of using it to determine the number of support times of the specific game state (general electric support). Specifically, in addition to (or instead of) when the result of the game becomes a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, when the value of the consecutive execution counter reaches a specific value, the special game You may make it generate|occur|produce a specific game state (universal electric support), without generating a state. That is, a so-called ceiling function may be installed.
The specific value (the value at which the ceiling function is activated) can be determined, for example, based on the probability value (the probability value of a special result in the special figure variation display game), specifically, for example, the reciprocal of the probability value, 2.5 It is a value within the range of 3.0 times or more. In addition, the number of times of support (hereinafter “number of times N”) of the chance mode (general electric support) that shifted to the opportunity when the value of the continuous execution counter reached a specific value
) can also be determined based on, for example, a probability value (probability value that results in a special result in a special figure variation display game). A value within the range.

In a game machine equipped with a ceiling function, the timing of clearing the value of the continuous execution number counter (the beginning of the count) can be selected as appropriate.
, At the start or end of the chance mode that transitioned when the value of the continuous execution counter reached a specific value (at the end of the support count), at the start or end of the first special game state, the game result At the start or end of the chance mode (at the end of the number of times of support) that was shifted to the opportunity to hit the support, it may be either one, more than one, or all can be Furthermore, when the ceiling function is installed in the game machine of 1 type+2 types, the value of the continuous execution number counter may be cleared at the start or end of the small winning game state ST16 in addition to these timings.
In addition, the continuous execution number counter may be one that always counts regardless of the game state, or a predetermined game state (for example, the first special game state, high probability state, general electric support state, etc.) The counting may be interrupted in a game state that is advantageous for players).

Further, the count timing (update timing) of the continuous execution number counter may be at the start or end of the variable time, or at the start or end of the stop display time.
It should be noted that the transition to the chance mode (general electric support) is preferably made at the end of the variation of the game when the value of the continuous execution counter reaches a specific value. For example, in a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, if the specific value (the value at which the ceiling function is activated) is 300, the 300th rotation in the special figure 2 When the fluctuation display of starts and the fluctuation display of the 301st rotation starts and ends with the special figure 1 before the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 ends,
When the fluctuation display of the 301st rotation of the special figure 1 is completed, the number of fluctuation start times is 301 times, and the fluctuation end number of times is 300 times. It is good, and it is good to move to the chance mode at the end of the fluctuation of the 300th rotation of the special figure 2.

Further, the continuous execution counter may count only one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, or may count both.
Moreover, the specific value (the value at which the ceiling function is activated) may be the same regardless of the probability setting value, or may be different according to the probability setting value. Further, when the specific value is the same regardless of the set probability values, the probability value for determining the specific value may be a probability value corresponding to any one of a plurality of set probability values. Also, the probability value for determining the specific value is the first special result (
It may be the probability value of the big hit), the probability value of the second special result (small hit), or the probability value of the first special result (big hit) and the second special result (small hit). It may be the total probability of the probability values of winning). Also, the probability value for determining the specific value may be a probability value in a high-probability state or a probability value in a low-probability state.

Also, the number of times N may be the same regardless of the probability setting value, or may be different according to the probability setting value. Also, when the number of times N is the same regardless of the set probability value, the probability value for determining the number of times N may be a probability value corresponding to any one of a plurality of set probability values. Further, the probability value for determining the number of times N may be the probability value of the first special result (big hit), the probability value of the second special result (small hit), or the probability value of the second special result (small hit). special results (
It may be the total probability of the probability value of the big hit) and the probability value of the second special result (small hit). Moreover, the probability value for determining the number of times N may be a probability value in a high-probability state or a probability value in a low-probability state. It is preferable that the probability value for determining the specific value and the probability value for determining the number of times N are the same.

Further, the specific value (the value at which the ceiling function is activated) may be of only one type, or may be selected from a plurality of types.
Further, the number of times N may have only one type, or may be selected from a plurality of types.
In addition, the opportunity to end the chance mode (general support), which is triggered when the value of the continuous execution counter reaches a specific value, is triggered when the game result becomes a specific result (support hit). It may be the same as the end opportunity of the chance mode (general electricity support) that was set, or it may be different.

In addition, in the chance mode (general electric support) that shifted when the value of the continuous execution counter reached a specific value, the probability of winning in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game , etc., there may be only one type of open/close pattern of the normal electric accessory, and the last displayed symbol (for example, the game stop symbol that causes the value of the continuous execution counter to reach a specific value), etc. You may make it select from multiple types based on.
In addition, during the chance mode (general electric support) that is triggered by the value of the continuous execution counter reaching a specific value, the support hit may be derived, or the support hit may not be derived. can be

In addition, the continuous execution counter counts the number of consecutive games that do not cause the special game state or counts the number of consecutive games that do not cause the first special game state. , and if the result of the game in which the value of the continuous execution counter reaches a specific value is a support hit, the trigger for shifting to the chance mode (general electric support) is the value of the continuous execution counter may have reached a specific value, or the result of the game may have been a win. That is, when the first condition that the value of the consecutive execution counter has reached a specific value and the second condition that the result of the game is a support hit are satisfied at the same time, the first condition may be prioritized. However, priority may be given to the second condition. Alternatively, which one to prioritize may be selected each time.

In addition, in a gaming machine of type 1 + type 2, if the number of continuous execution counters counts the number of times games that do not generate the special game state are continuously executed, or games that do not generate the first special game state are continuously executed and the number of consecutive executions is counted, and the result of the game in which the value of the counter for the number of consecutive executions reaches a specific value is a small win with support (a small win in which the number of times of support is not 0) In addition, the opportunity to shift to the chance mode (general electric support) may be that the value of the continuous execution counter reaches a specific value, or that the game result is a small hit with support. Also good. That is, when the first condition that the value of the consecutive execution counter reaches a specific value and the second condition that the result of the game is a small win with support are satisfied at the same time, the first condition is prioritized. Alternatively, priority may be given to the second condition. Alternatively, which one to prioritize may be selected each time.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives the player a game value when the result of the game is a special result. A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state to be provided, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game effect,
A normal variable winning device 37 in which a start condition is established by winning of a game ball is provided, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. (general electric support) and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a special result (jackpot), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, or when the number of game executions satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific game state can be generated without generating a special game state, The effect control means can be configured to execute a notification effect for suggesting or notifying information about the specific game state before starting the specific game state.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and gives a game value to the player when the result of the game is a special result. A game machine capable of generating a game state, comprising game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game effect, and starting by winning a game ball. A normal variable winning device 37 that satisfies a condition is provided, and the game control means has a normal game state and a specific game state (general electric support) in which winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the normal game state. , and a special game state can be generated, and when the result of the game is a predetermined result (jackpot) among the special results, a specific game state is generated after the special game state is generated, and the game result is is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, or when the number of times the game is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, a specific game state is generated without generating a special game state, and the effect control means can be configured to execute a notification effect for suggesting or notifying information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state.
Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp information about the specific game state before the start of the specific game state, and the interest in the game is improved.

Here, the "game execution count" is, for example, (1) the number of consecutive executions of losing games, (2) the number of consecutive executions of games that do not cause a special game state, and (3) the first special game state. It may be the number of times a game that does not generate a game state is continuously executed.
In addition, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied" here is, for example, (1) jackpot game state (first
(2) When the number of game executions after the end of the special game state) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 900 times), the number of times the game is executed after the end of the (2) small winning game state (second special game state) is the predetermined number of times. (
For example, 900 times), (3) In the chance mode (general electric support) in which the support winning pattern stopped and occurred, the number of game executions after the support number (for example, 100 times) ended is a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times), (4) when the number of game executions after power-on reaches a predetermined number (for example, 900 times), (5) when the number of game executions in the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 900 times), or (6) when the number of game executions in the low-probability state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times).

In addition, when the result of the game is a specific result (support hit) different from the special result, a function to generate a specific game state without generating a special game state, and when the number of times the game is executed meets a predetermined condition Of the functions that generate a specific game state without generating a special game state (ceiling function),
A configuration having only one of the functions is possible, and a configuration having both functions is also possible.

[Decoration identification information (large pattern)]
In each embodiment, the decoration identification information Z (large pattern) displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 of the display device 41 is composed of a number image Z1 and a frame image Z2 (FIG. 89(a)).
see). The decoration identification information Z (large pattern) may be composed of, for example, a numeric image Z1 and a character image Z3 (see FIG. 89(b)).

The decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 should be composed of at least the number image Z1 and the character image Z3. That is, the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 includes the number image Z1 and the character image Z3, the frame image Z2, the frame decoration image for decorating the frame image Z2, and the character image Z3. A character decoration image to be decorated (for example, an image of a weapon or item held by the character), an emphasized image for emphasizing the number image Z1 (for example, an effect image applied around the number), etc. may be included.
In the decoration identification information Z composed of the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z3, it is possible to leave the numeric image Z1 and erase the character image Z3. i.e.
The display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 includes:
There is a character mode in which the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z3 are displayed, and a non-character mode in which the numeric image Z1 is displayed but the character image Z3 is not displayed.

FIGS. 89(b), (c) and 90 show the case of executing a game in which the ornament identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is variably displayed as the ornament special figure variation display game. FIG. 89(c) is an example of a timing chart and changes in visibility.
90(b) and FIG. 90 are examples of display on the display device 41. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 89(b), when the special figure variation display game is finished, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are in a state in which the identification information is stopped and displayed. Here, decoration identification information Z of the character mode is stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

When the next special figure variation display game starts from this state, as shown in FIG.
The variable display of the identification information starts in the decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 (
t130). The fluctuation display on the first decoration game display section 81 is, for example, low speed fluctuation → high speed fluctuation →
Low-speed fluctuation→temporary stop is performed in this order, and as the first low-speed fluctuation, an erasing effect for erasing the character image Z3 is executed in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas of the first decoration game display portion 81. (t130-t132). The erasing effect is a effect using the decoration identification information Z. For example, as shown in FIGS. This is an effect of erasing the character image Z3 of Z.
Here, the axial rotation display is "a variable display mode in which the disk rotates around an axis extending in the radial direction". That is, in the axial rotation display of the decoration identification information Z, for example, a virtual disk having the decoration identification information Z with the character mode drawn on the front side and the decoration identification information Z without the character mode drawn on the back side is displayed as the virtual circle. A display that rotates around an axis along the radial direction of the plate is performed.

In the axially rotating display for erasing the character image Z3, the virtual disk is rotated about its axis to change from a state in which only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the decoration identification information Z of the character mode is drawn) is visible. Through the state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible, the state is changed to the state in which only the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the decoration identification information Z of the non-character mode is drawn) is visible. The character image Z3 disappears at the time when only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible (t131), and from then on, the decoration identification information Z without the character mode is displayed. Therefore, the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) become closer to the state where only the side surface of the virtual disk can be seen.
The visibility of gradually decreases (t130 to t131), and when only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible, the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) become invisible (
t131), and thereafter, as the state where only the back surface of the virtual disk becomes visible, the numerical image Z1 (
The visibility of the decoration identification information Z) is gradually improved (t131 to t132).

In this way, when the high-speed fluctuation is started, the character becomes unmanned, so that it is possible to avoid problems such as the player erroneously recognizing the effect and the character image Z3 interfering with the high-speed fluctuation. .
Also, when the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is switched from the character presence mode to the character non-display mode, that is, when the character image Z3 is changed from the display state to the non-display state. In addition, by executing an erasing effect that gradually lowers the visibility of the character image Z3, the character image Z3 can be naturally erased.
It is possible to make the player unaware of erasing the character image Z3. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the non-display state of the character image Z3.
Also, the erasing effect is a effect using the decoration identification information Z, and can be said to be a variation mode different from the normal variation mode (scrolling from top to bottom in the case of this embodiment). therefore,
It is possible to emphasize the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information Z by executing the erasing effect at the start of the variable display (variably displaying the ornament identification information Z in a variable mode different from the normal variation mode). Become.

When the character image Z3 disappears, the first decoration game display section 8 is displayed as shown in FIG. 90(d).
High-speed variation of the ornament identification information Z starts in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of 1 (t132
). Since the number image Z1 (decoration identification information Z) fluctuates at high speed, the visibility of the number image Z1 (decoration identification information Z) is lowered (t132 to t133).
In this embodiment, the number image Z1 drawn on the back surface of the virtual disk is larger in size than the number image Z1 drawn on the front surface of the virtual disk. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and (c), the numeric image Z1 in the decoration identification information Z without character mode is an enlarged version of the numeric image Z1 in the decoration identification information Z with character mode. The enlarged numeric image Z1 is changed at high speed. This makes it possible to emphasize the start of high-speed variation of the ornament identification information Z. FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(e), the high-speed fluctuation of the decoration identification information Z ends in the left fluctuation display area and the low-speed fluctuation starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(f), the left fluctuation display area At , the low-speed variation of the decoration identification information Z ends and the temporary stop starts. Further, as shown in FIG. 90(f), the high-speed fluctuation of the decoration identification information Z ends in the right fluctuation display area and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t133). When the low-speed variation of the decoration identification information Z ends in the variable display area and the temporary stop starts, the ready-to-win state is entered (t134).

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 90(e) and (f), when the ornament identification information Z ends the high-speed variation (starts the low-speed variation), the display mode of the ornament identification information Z is changed to the non-character display mode. It is designed to switch from mode to character mode. That is, the high-speed fluctuation is performed without character mode, and the subsequent low-speed fluctuation and temporary stop are performed with character mode. Also, during low-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases. Therefore, the visibility of the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) is gradually improved during the low speed variation (t133 to t134).
In addition, in this way, the character image Z
By the decoration effect of 3, it is possible to make the decoration identification information Z that is changing at low speed and the decoration identification information Z that is temporarily stopped more conspicuous than the decoration identification information Z that is changing at high speed.

In FIG. 89(c), for convenience, the timing and visibility of the numeric image Z1 displayed in the right fluctuating display area are shown as the timing and visibility of the numeric image Z1, and the character image Z
3 shows the timing and visibility of the character image Z3 displayed in the right fluctuation display area. Therefore, in FIG. 89(c), "t133" is the timing to end high-speed fluctuation (start low-speed fluctuation) in the right fluctuation display area, and the timing to end high-speed fluctuation (start low-speed fluctuation) in the left fluctuation display area. is before "t133" (see FIG. 6(e)). Further, "t134" is the timing of ending the low speed fluctuation (starting temporary stop) in the right fluctuation display area, and the timing of ending low speed fluctuation (starting temporary stop) in the left fluctuation display area is earlier than "t134". (see FIG. 6(f)).

Then, when the SP reach state develops, as shown in FIGS. 90(h) to 90(j), a first superimposed effect of displaying a first superimposed image 89a superimposed on the ornament identification information Z on the display device 41 is performed. is executed (t135 to t137).
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 90(i), during the execution of the first superimposed effect, the display mode of the decoration identification information Z is switched from the character mode to the character non-mode (t
136). Therefore, when the first superimposed effect starts and the first superimposed image 89a overlapping the ornament identification information Z is displayed on the front side of the ornament identification information Z, the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 (the ornament identification information Z ) is lowered (t135), and after that, the character image Z3 becomes invisible (t136) due to the character becoming unmanned during the execution of the first superimposed effect.
, the first superimposed effect ends and the first superimposed image 89a disappears, thereby improving the visibility of the number image Z1 (decoration identification information Z) (t137).

In this way, when the SP ready-to-win state develops, the character becomes apathetic, so that it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the player erroneously recognizing the effect and the character image Z3 interfering with the SP ready-to-win effect. becomes.
Also, when the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is switched from the character presence mode to the character non-display mode, that is, when the character image Z3 is changed from the display state to the non-display state. Furthermore, by executing the first superimposed effect that lowers the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, the player's attention can be directed to the first superimposed effect. It becomes possible to therefore,
It is possible to make it difficult for players to feel uncomfortable with the non-display state of the character image Z3.

When the first superimposed image 89a disappears, the SP reach state develops (t137), as shown in FIG. 90(j). Here, as the SP ready-to-win effect, a effect is executed in which the decoration identification information Z is changed at a low speed in the middle fluctuation display area. It should be noted that the SP reach production, for example, decoration identification information Z
may be changed to different ornament identification information Z (see FIG. 53).
After that, as shown in FIG. 90(k), the slow fluctuation of the decoration identification information Z ends in the middle fluctuation display area, and the temporary stop starts. As a result, the character-independent ornament identification information Z is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first ornament game display section 81 (t13).
8).

During the temporary stop display of the ornament identification information Z, as shown in FIGS. is executed (t139 to t141).
In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 90(m), during the execution of the second superimposed effect, the display mode of the decoration identification information Z is switched from the character non-character mode to the character mode (t
140). Therefore, when the second superimposed effect is started and the second superimposed image 89b overlapping the ornament identification information Z is displayed on the front side of the ornament identification information Z, the visibility of the number image Z1 (decoration identification information Z) is increased. is reduced (t139), and then the character image Z3 becomes visible (t140) by changing to the character state during execution of the second superimposed effect, the second superimposed effect ends, and the second superimposed image 89b appears. By disappearing, the visibility of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) is improved (t141).

In this way, when the display mode of the decoration identification information Z composed of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is switched from the character non-character mode to the character mode, that is, the character image Z
3 is changed from the non-display state to the display state, by executing the second superimposed effect that reduces the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, the player can turn his or her attention to the second superimposed effect. ,
It is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the appearance of the character image Z3. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the display state of the character image Z3.

When the second superimposed image 89b disappears, as shown in FIG. 90(n), the visibility of the numeric image Z1 and the character image Z3 (decoration identification information Z) is improved (t141). After that, the temporary stop of the decoration identification information Z is finished, the variable display is stopped, and the stop display time is reached, and as shown in FIG. , the identification information is stopped and displayed (t142).

In FIGS. 90(h) and (i), the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game display section 82,
The portions of the standby memory display portion 83, the in-execution memory display portion 84, and the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b overlapping the first superimposed image 89a are visible through the first superimposed image 89a. but not limited to this. For example, a first decorative game display section 81, a second decorative game display section 82, a standby memory display section 83, an active memory display section 84, and a start memory number display section 85a, 8
An opaque image may be displayed as the first superimposed image 89a so that the portion of 5b that overlaps with the first superimposed image 89a becomes invisible due to the first superimposed image 89a.

Also, the first superimposed image 89a may be an image superimposed on at least part of the decoration identification information Z. FIG. Here, "to overlap" means to overlap while being positioned on the near side (player's side). In other words, the image superimposed on at least part of the decoration identification information Z is an image that is displayed closer to the viewer than the decoration identification information Z and overlaps at least part of the decoration identification information Z. FIG. Therefore, even if the image overlaps the ornament identification information Z in the front and rear, the image displayed behind the ornament identification information Z is not an image that overlaps the ornament identification information Z. FIG.

Specifically, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on the entire first decoration game display portion 81, but the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the first decoration game display portion 81. It may be an image to be superimposed.
90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the second ornament game display section 82, but the first superimposed image 89a is an image superimposed on the entire second ornament game display section 82. Alternatively, an image that is not superimposed on the entirety of the second decoration game display portion 82 (an image that is displayed on the back side of the second decoration game display portion 82, or an image that is displayed on the entire second decoration game display portion 82). non-overlapping images).

In FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on the entire standby storage display section 83, but the first superimposed image 89a is an image superimposed on a part of the standby storage display section 83. Alternatively, an image that does not overlap the entirety of the standby storage display section 83 (an image that is displayed on the back side of the standby storage display section 83, or an image that does not overlap the entirety of the standby storage display section 83). It can be.
Also, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on a part of the in-execution storage display section 84, but the first superimposition image 89a is an image superimposed on the entirety of the in-execution storage display section 84. Alternatively, an image that does not overlap all of the memory-in-execution display section 84 (an image that is displayed behind the memory-in-execution display section 84, or an image that does not overlap the entire memory-in-execution display section 84). It can be.
Also, in FIG. 90, the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on part of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b, but the first superimposed image 89a is superimposed on all of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b. or an image (
It may be an image displayed on the back side of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b, or an image that does not overlap with the entire starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b).

In FIGS. 90(l) and (m), the first decoration game display section 81 and the starting memory number display section 85a,
A portion of 85b that overlaps with the second superimposed image 89b is visible through the second superimposed image 89b, but is not limited to this. For example, the portion of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b that overlaps the second superimposed image 89b is the second superimposed image 8
An opaque image may be displayed as the second superimposed image 89b so as to be invisible by 9b.

Also, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least part of the decoration identification information Z. FIG.
Specifically, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on the entire first decoration game display section 81, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on a part of the first decoration game display section 81. It may be an image to be superimposed.
Also, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is not superimposed on the entire second decoration game display portion 82, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on at least a part of the second decoration game display portion 82. It may be an image.
In addition, in FIG. 90, the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on part of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b, but the second superimposed image 89b is superimposed on all of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b. It may be an image that does not overlap all of the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b.

Further, when the second superimposed image 89b is displayed while the standby storage display section 83 is being displayed, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the standby storage display section 83. Alternatively, it may be an image that is not superimposed on the whole of the standby storage display section 83 .
Further, when the second superimposed image 89b is displayed while the memory-in-execution display section 84 is being displayed, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image superimposed on at least a part of the memory-in-execution display section 84. Alternatively, it may be an image that is not superimposed on the entirety of the in-execution memory display section 84 .

The effect control device 300 executes an erasing effect at a first timing (for example, at the start of variable display) at which the character image Z3 is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and the character image Z
3 is changed from the display state to the non-display state (for example, at the time of development to SP reach), the first superimposed effect is executed, and the character image Z3 is converted from the non-display state to the display state at the third timing. (For example, at the end of SP reach), the second superimposed effect is executed.
Therefore, the pattern of the effect executed when the character image Z3 is changed from the display state to the non-display state (hereinafter referred to as "non-display effect") differs between the first timing and the second timing. Depending on the non-display effect pattern, it is possible to easily grasp whether the current time is the first timing (for example, when the variable display starts) or the second timing (for example, when the SP reach occurs).
In addition, since there are a plurality of non-display effect patterns, the interest in the game is improved.

It should be noted that it is possible to execute the first superimposed effect as a non-display effect at the start of the variable display (first timing). has not started, the player may misrecognize. On the other hand, by executing the erasing effect as the non-display effect at the start of the variable display (first timing), the character image Z3 can be erased while performing the effect using the decoration identification information Z. That is, since the character image Z3 can be erased while indicating that the variable display is being performed,
It is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation.

In addition, it is possible to execute an erasing effect as a non-display effect at the time of development to SP reach (second timing). If the identification information Z changes (the ready-to-win pattern changes), there is a risk that the player will misrecognize. On the other hand, by executing the first superimposed effect as a non-display effect at the time of development to the SP reach (second timing), the character image Z3 is erased while performing the effect using an image different from the decoration identification information Z. can do. That is, since the character image Z3 can be erased while indicating that it is in reach, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation.

For example, if the decoration identification information Z has 12 types of general patterns (symbols 1 to 9) and special patterns (symbols A to C), and a different character image Z3 is added to each of these 12 types, the erasing effect is produced. There are 12 modes. In addition, there are cases where the character image Z3 is not added to some patterns (for example, non-probability variation patterns), and since the decoration identification information Z that does not add the character image Z3 has no character mode, the decoration identification that does not add the character image Z3 The erasing effect using the information Z is not executed. Therefore, when the ornament identification information Z includes 12 kinds of general symbols (symbols 1 to 9) and special symbols (symbols A to C), there are at most 12 kinds of erasing effects. That is, there is a limit to the number of types of effect modes of the erasing effect. In this embodiment, there are 12 types of effect modes of the erasing effect.

In FIG. 90, a rounded rectangular image is displayed as the first superimposed image 89a, but the display mode (shape, color, size, etc.) of the first superimposed image 89a is not limited to this. Also, the first superimposed image 89a may be a still image or a moving image. Therefore, there is no limit to the number of types of effects modes of the first superimposed effects. In this embodiment, 15 types of first superimposed images 89
Suppose that any one of a is displayed. Which one is displayed is selected, for example, when determining execution of the first superimposed effect.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, there are 15 types of effect modes of the first superimposed effect. Since there are 12 types of effect modes of the erasing effect, the first superimposed effect has more effect modes than the erasing effect. Although the number of types of performance modes of erasing performance is limited, the number of types of performance modes of the first superimposed performance is not limited, so that the number of performance modes of the first superimposed performance is greater than that of the erasing performance. , it becomes possible to execute a wide variety of performances as the non-display performance, and the interest in the game is improved.

Note that the effect mode of the erasing effect is not limited to 12 types. Also, the effect mode of the first superimposed effect is not limited to 15 types. Also, the number of effect modes of the first superimposed effect may be greater than the effect mode of the erase effect, may be less than the effect mode of the erase effect, or may be the same number as the effect mode of the erase effect.
Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit or the like may be suggested by the effect mode of the first superimposed effect (the display mode of the first superimposed image 89a).

In this embodiment, the non-display required time T1 required for the character image Z3 to be in the non-display state at the start of the variable display (first timing), that is, from the start of the erasing effect to the character image Z3 being in the non-display state. The time (t130 to t131) is the non-display required time T3 required for the character image Z3 to be in the non-display state at the time of development to the SP reach (second timing), that is, the character image Z3 from the start of the first superimposed effect. becomes a non-display state (t135 to t136).
In addition, the execution time T2 of the non-display effect performed at the start of the variable display (first timing), that is, the time from the start to the end of the erasing effect (t130 to t132) is the time of development to the SP reach (second timing). It is shorter than the execution time T4 of the non-display effect to be performed in 1, that is, the time from the start to the end of the first superimposed effect (t135 to t137).

By making the execution time T2 shorter than the execution time T4 in this way, it is possible to smoothly start the high-speed fluctuation. Further, by making the execution time T4 longer than the execution time T2, it is possible to ensure a sufficient time for executing an effect that heightens the player's expectation toward the development of the SP reach. That is, in the present embodiment, the required non-display times T1 and T3, which are the times from the start of the non-display effect until the character image Z3 is in the non-display state, and the execution times T2 and T4 of the non-display effect, depend on the progress of the game. Since the time is adjusted accordingly, the interest in the game is improved.
The non-display duration T1 may be shorter than the non-display duration T3, may be longer than the non-display duration T3, or may be the same length as the non-display duration T3.
Also, the execution time T2 may be shorter than the execution time T4, longer than the execution time T4, or may be the same length as the execution time T4.

In FIG. 90, an image simulating a cloud is displayed as the second superimposed image 89b, but the display mode (shape, color, size, etc.) of the second superimposed image 89b is not limited to this. Also, the second superimposed image 89b may be a still image or a moving image. Therefore, there is no limit to the number of types of effect modes of the second superimposed effect. In this embodiment, there is one type of second superimposed image 89b.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, there is one type of effect mode of the second superimposed effect. Since there are 15 types of effect modes of the first superimposed effect, the second superimposed effect has fewer effect modes than the first superimposed effect. The first superimposed effect not only has the role of reducing the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, but also has the role of increasing the player's expectation toward the development of SP reach. increases. On the other hand, the role of the second superimposed effect is to reduce the visibility of the decoration identification information Z, and has no other role (such as raising the player's expectation). Therefore, by making the effect mode of the second superimposed effect smaller than the effect mode of the first superimposed effect, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited storage capacity. Also, by making the production mode of the second superimposed production one type,
Since the process of selecting the effect mode of the second superimposed effect can be omitted, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the first superimposed image 89a and the display mode of the second superimposed image 89b are different, the superimposed image allows the player to understand that the current time is the second timing (for example, development to SP reach). time) or the third timing (for example, at the end of SP reach).
Note that the effect mode of the second superimposed effect is not limited to one type, and may be plural types. Also, the effect mode of the first superimposed effect is not limited to 15 types. Further, the number of effect modes of the second superimposed effect may be less than the effect mode of the first superimposed effect, may be more than the effect mode of the first superimposed effect, or may be the same number as the effect modes of the first superimposed effect. can be Also, the number of effect modes of the second superimposed effect may be more than the effect mode of the erasing effect, less than the effect mode of the erasing effect, or the same number as the effect mode of the erasing effect.

In this embodiment, the execution time T5 of the superimposed effect performed at the end of the SP reach (third timing)
That is, the time from the start to the end of the second superimposed production (t139 to t141) is the execution time T4 of the superimposed production performed at the time of development to the SP reach (second timing), that is, from the start to the end of the first superimposed production time (t135 to t137).
By making the execution time T5 shorter than the execution time T4 in this way, it is possible to smoothly start the stop display. Further, by making the execution time T4 longer than the execution time T5, it is possible to secure a sufficient time for executing an effect that heightens the player's expectation toward the development of the SP reach. That is, in this embodiment, the execution time T4,
Since the time T5 corresponds to the progress of the game, the interest in the game is improved.
The execution time T5 may be shorter than the execution time T4, may be longer than the execution time T4, or may be the same length as the execution time T4. Moreover, the execution time T5 is the execution time T2.
It may be shorter, longer than the execution time T2, or as long as the execution time T2.

The first superimposed image 89a may be an image whose transparency gradually decreases, as shown in FIG. 91, for example. As a result, for example, as shown from t135 to t137 in FIG.
Due to the superimposed effect, the visibility of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is gradually lowered, and the character image Z3 can be erased more naturally.
Also, the second superimposed image 89b may be an image whose transparency gradually increases, as shown in FIG. 91, for example. As a result, for example, as shown in t139 to t141 in FIG. 91, the visibility of the number image Z1 and the character image Z3 is gradually improved by the second superimposition effect, and the character image Z3 can appear more naturally. Become.

The second superimposed effect executed after the first superimposed effect shown in FIG. 91 (the effect in which the transparency of the first superimposed image 89a gradually decreases) is the second superimposed effect shown in FIG. The effect is not limited to the effect in which the transparency gradually increases), and for example, the second superimposed effect (the effect in which the transparency of the second superimposed image 89b does not change) shown in FIG. 89(c) may be used.
The first superimposed effect executed before the second superimposed effect shown in FIG. 91 (the effect in which the transparency of the second superimposed image 89b gradually increases) is the first superimposed effect shown in FIG. image 89
89(c) (in which the transparency of the first superimposed image 89a does not change) may be used.

The erasing effect may be any effect as long as the visibility of the character image Z3 is gradually lowered, and is not limited to the effect of displaying the decoration identification information Z rotated around an axis.
For example, as shown in FIG. 92, the erasing effect may be an effect in which only the character image Z3 is rotated on an axis. Specifically, the virtual disk is rotated about its axis to change from a state in which only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character image Z3 is drawn) is visible to a state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible. It may be a performance. In this case, for example, t130 to t131 in FIG.
, the visibility of the character image Z3 gradually decreases as only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible, and when only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible (t131), the character image Z3 becomes becomes invisible. Therefore, by executing the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the visibility of the character image Z3 changes, but the visibility of the number image Z1 does not change.

Also, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible is not changed to the state in which only the rear surface of the virtual disk is visible. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 92,
The length of the execution time T2 of the erasing effect is the same as the length of the non-display required time T1 required for the character image Z3 to enter the non-display state at the start of the variable display (first timing).
Further, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the display mode of the number image Z1 does not change by executing the erasing effect. That is, in the erasing effect shown in FIG. 89(c) (the effect of displaying the entire decoration identification information Z rotated around an axis), the size of the number image Z1 was enlarged during execution of the erasing effect, but the erasing effect shown in FIG. In an effect in which only the image Z3 is rotated on an axis), the size of the number image Z1 does not change during execution of the erasing effect. Therefore, when executing the elimination effect shown in FIG. 92, for example, as shown in FIG.
31 to t132), an enlarging effect of gradually enlarging the numeral image Z1 may be performed, and the enlarged numeral image Z1 may be changed at high speed.
Alternatively, when executing the erasing effect shown in FIG. 92, the high-speed fluctuation may be started immediately after the erasing effect ends. That is, the high-speed fluctuation start timing may be set to "t131", which is the point in time when the character becomes unmanned.

Further, the erasing effect may be, for example, a effect in which the character image Z3 moves from the vicinity of the number image Z1 to the outside of the display area and disappears. In this case, as the character image Z3 moves (moves), the visibility of the character image Z3 decreases. After that, when the entire character image Z3 is positioned outside the display area, the character image Z3 becomes invisible. Therefore, while the erasing effect is being executed, the visibility of the character image Z3 changes, but the visibility of the number image Z1 does not change.

Further, in FIGS. 89C, 91, and 92, the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the non-display state is during execution of the first superimposed effect (t136), but the character image Z3 is in the non-display state. The timing of switching to may be at the start of the first superimposed effect (t135) or at the end of the first superimposed effect (t137). If the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the non-display state is the end of the first superimposed effect (t137), the character image Z3 will be in the non-display state at the time of development to SP reach (second timing). The length of the required non-display required time T3 and the length of the execution time T4 of the first superimposed effect are the same.
89(c), 91, and 92, the timing at which the character image Z3 is switched to the display state is during execution of the second superimposed effect (t140).
The timing of switching to the display state of 3 may be at the start of the second superimposed effect (t139) or at the end of the second superimposed effect (t141).

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variation display game) that displays identification information (decorative identification information Z) in the display area of the display device 41, and the result of the game is A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when a special result is obtained, wherein the identification information includes a first component (character image Z3) and a second component (number image Z1), and the first component can be configured to be in a non-display state while the identification information is being displayed (see FIG. 90).
Therefore, while the identification information is being displayed, the first component can be displayed or hidden, thereby making the game more interesting.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information (decorative identification information Z) in the variable display area of the display device 41 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, wherein the identification information includes a first component (character image Z3) and a second component. and a component (numeric image Z1), the first component can be hidden while the identification information is being displayed, and an effect (non-display) is provided when the first component is hidden. display effect) can be executed, and the form (pattern) of the effect can be configured to differ according to the timing of making the first component non-display (see FIG. 90).
Specifically, for example, the effect (non-display effect) that is executed when the first component is placed in the non-display state includes an erasing effect (first mode (first pattern)) and a first superimposed effect (second mode (second pattern)), the elimination effect (first mode (first pattern)) is executed at the first timing, and the first superimposed effect (second mode (second pattern)) is executed at the second timing be done.

Therefore, by executing an effect (non-display effect) when the first component is hidden, the first component can be naturally erased or the player's consciousness can be diverted from the erasing of the first component. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for players to feel uncomfortable with the non-display state of the first component, and the decorativeness of the game and the view of the world are not spoiled, so it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game. .
Furthermore, since the aspect (pattern) of the effect to be executed when the first component is hidden is different depending on the timing when the first component is switched to the non-display state, depending on the effect, at any timing It is possible to suggest whether
In addition, there are a plurality of aspects (patterns) for the effect to be executed when the first component is hidden.
Therefore, the interest in the game is improved compared to the case where there are no multiple modes.

Note that the effect (non-display effect) executed when the first component is put in the non-display state is not limited to the erasing effect or the first superimposed effect. That is, the effect (non-display effect) executed when the first component is put in the non-display state may be, for example, an effect using the display device 41 such as an erasing effect or a first superimposed effect, An effect using a board effect device 44 movable to the front of the display device 41 may be used, or an effect using a display plate 350 disposed so as to cover the front surface of the game board 30 may be used.
Also, the mode of the non-display effect is not limited to the two types of the first mode and the second mode, and may be three or more types.
Moreover, the mode of the non-display effect may be one type. Specifically, for example, the elimination effect may be executed as the non-display effect at both the first timing and the second timing, or the first superimposed effect may be executed as the non-display effect at both the first timing and the second timing. may be executed. In that case, the non-display effect of the same mode is executed regardless of the timing, so that the player can easily grasp that the first component (character image Z3) disappears due to the non-display effect. . Further, when there is one type of non-display effect mode, the first timing and the second timing
The execution time T2 of the non-display effect performed at the first timing and the execution time T4 of the non-display effect performed at the second timing should be the same length from the viewpoint that the same effect pattern can be reused at the timing. is preferred.
Also, the first timing is not limited to the start of the variable display. Also, the second timing is not limited to the time of development to SP reach.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment executes a game (decorative special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information (decorative identification information Z) in the variable display area of the display device 41 based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, A gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is awarded to a player when the result of the game is a special result, wherein the identification information includes a first component (character image Z3) and a second component. and a component (numeric image Z1), wherein the state of the first component can be changed between a display state and a non-display state while the identification information is being displayed, and when the state of the first component is changed It is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility of the identification information, and the mode (pattern) of the effect when changing the state from the display state to the non-display state and when changing the state from the non-display state to the display state can be configured differently (see FIG. 90).
Specifically, for example, effects that reduce the visibility of identification information include a first superimposed effect (first mode (first pattern)) and a second superimposed effect (second mode (second pattern)). , The first superimposed effect (first mode (first pattern)) is executed when the state is changed from the display state to the non-display state, and the second superimposed effect (second mode (second pattern)) is performed from the non-display state. Executed at state transition to display state.

Therefore, by executing an effect that reduces the visibility of the identification information when changing the state of the first component, it is possible to divert the player's attention from changing the state of the first component. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the change of state of the first component, and the decoration of the game and the view of the world are not spoiled, so that the interest of the game can be prevented from decreasing.
Furthermore, since the mode (pattern) of the effect that reduces the visibility of the identification information differs between when the state is changed to the non-display state and when the state is changed to the display state, depending on the mode of effect, the state to the non-display state It is possible to suggest whether conversion or state conversion to display state is being performed.
In addition, since there are a plurality of modes (patterns) for rendering to lower the visibility of the identification information, the game is more interesting than when there are no multiple modes.

Note that the effect of reducing the visibility of the identification information (hereinafter referred to as “visibility reduction effect”) is not limited to the superimposed effect (first superimposed effect, second superimposed effect).
The visibility lowering effect performed when changing the state from the display state to the non-display state may be, for example, a effect of changing only the display mode of the character image Z3 in the decoration identification information Z. FIG. As an effect for changing only the display mode of the character image Z3, for example, the character image Z
Effect of rotating and displaying only 3 and erasing it, effect of the character image Z3 moving from the vicinity of the number image Z1 to the outside of the display area and disappearing, effect of the character image Z3 gradually decreasing in transparency, and explosion. For example, the character image Z3 is disassembled into a plurality of small pieces and disappears. By changing only the display mode of the character image Z3 and not changing the display mode of the number image Z1, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing a change in the ornament identification information Z during temporary stop display.
In addition, the visibility reduction effect performed when changing the state from the display state to the non-display state is performed by the display device 4
1, for example, a board effect device 44 that can move to the front of the display device 41
, or a display board 350 arranged to cover the front surface of the game board 30 may be used.

In addition, the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state is, for example, an effect in which only the character image Z3 is displayed by rotating the axis (the virtual disk is rotated about the axis, and the virtual disk from a state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible to a state in which only the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character image Z3 is drawn) is visible), or the character image Z3
moves from outside the display area to the vicinity of the number image Z1, or the transparency of the character image Z3 gradually increases. It may be an effect in which the characters are assembled to form the character image Z3.
In addition, the visibility reduction effect performed when changing the state from the non-display state to the display state is performed by the display device 4
1, for example, a board effect device 44 that can move to the front of the display device 41
, or a display board 350 arranged to cover the front surface of the game board 30 may be used.
Further, the timing (third timing) for executing the visibility reduction effect performed when the state is changed from the non-display state to the display state is not limited to the end of the SP reach.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment, and for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, etc. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. Also, the configurations of the modifications and the embodiments described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

For example, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine that preferentially executes the special figure 2 variation display game over the special figure 1 variation display game, and the gaming machine 10 may be a special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a gaming machine that executes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in order of winning, or a special figure 1 It may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the game machine 10 is not limited to a game machine that does not simultaneously display the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41. . That is, the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be displayed on the display device 41 at the same time.

Moreover, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a gaming machine having a specific area (variable probability operating area). That is, based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the specific area switch 38d has detected the game ball), instead of generating a high probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a probability variable big hit. Based on this fact, a high probability state may be generated.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 is a sub-information display device (fourth pattern LED) that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special symbol variation display game separately from the decoration special symbol variation display game displayed on the display device 41.
may be provided. In addition to displaying the fourth pattern, the sub-information display device may also display the starting memory number.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be explained. It should be noted that, basically, it has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and mainly different parts will be described below. The gaming machine of this embodiment is mainly different in the contents of the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 93, the game board 30 of the present embodiment includes an upper movable accessory 44a and a lower movable accessory 44b as a board effect device 44 that performs game effects by operating.
The upper movable accessory 44a is provided on the upper part of the center case 40, and can move up and down between the upper position of the display device 41 and the position shown by the dotted line, which is the position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. It is possible.
The lower movable accessory 44b is provided in the lower part of the center case 40, and rotates between the lower position of the display device 41 and the position indicated by the dotted line, which is the position on the center side of the display device 41 from this position. is possible.

Also, in the lower right part of the center case 40, there is provided a jackpot notification unit 630 that can be lit when the game is in a special game state (first special game state) based on a jackpot (first special result). The big hit notification unit 630 does not light up in the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game. In the first decoration game display section 81, the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left variation display area 81a, the middle variation display area 81b, and the right variation display area 81c, and then the stationary display is performed to display the decoration special figure variation display game. .

In addition, a starting memory display section 90 that mainly displays information related to starting memory is provided at the lower center of the display area of the display device 41 .
In the starting memory display unit 90, the decorative special figure starting memory display 8 corresponding to the stored starting memory
3a, a running memory display unit 84 that displays a running memory display 84a that shows information about the starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game that is currently running,
is provided. In addition, the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a also form a part of the starting memory display unit 90.

In the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display 8 corresponding to the start memory (first start memory or second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game
3a is displayed. The decoration special figure start memory display 83a displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 is
Corresponding one-to-one with the starting memory to be the execution right of the special figure fluctuation display game, so that the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a at the left end becomes the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a corresponding to the first stored starting memory are displayed in the order in which they are remembered, and each time the earliest starting memory is digested, it moves to the left.
That is, the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a is the first displayed when the starting memory exists
The display is made, and the standby memory display section 83 makes a second display that can be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory. In addition, the standby storage display unit 83 can be said to be a second display that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the special figure variation display game is executed.

In addition, in the standby memory display unit 83, the decoration special figure start memory display 83a corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It is possible to display only one of the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory) that becomes.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prediction such as the fluctuation pattern are suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display 83a corresponding to the starting memory. is possible.

The standby memory display section 83 is provided with a game information display section 91 for displaying information about a game.
In this game information display section 91, information about the game is displayed by scrolling characters so as to flow to the left.
is scrolled.
The information displayed in FIG. 94(a) is the currently set presentation mode (here,
a mode), which can be set in the game machine of the present embodiment.
It is the information of the game explanation which is the information unrelated to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed.
The decoration special figure start memory display 83a and the game information display unit 91 are arranged vertically side by side, and the direction in which the characters flow and the direction in which the decoration special figure start memory display 83a moves when digested are the same direction. It has become. Thereby, even when paying attention to one of the decoration special figure starting memory display 83a and the game information display part 91, it becomes possible to easily grasp the information of the other with the same line of sight flow.

The information displayed on the game information display section 91 can be arbitrarily set, and the first information, which is information unrelated to the game being executed, and the second information, which is information related to the game being executed, can be set arbitrarily. Displayable.
As the first information, as shown in FIG. 94(a), the description of the settable effect mode, which is information unrelated to the special figure variation display game being executed, the description of the function of the gaming machine, Those that display game explanations such as explanations of characters, special figure fluctuation display that is being executed Those that display starting memory related displays that suggest or inform about starting memories that are information unrelated to the game being executed, special figure fluctuation display that is being executed Game status display that displays non-game-related information such as the current production mode, current probability status, number of time reductions, current shooting direction, number of game balls acquired in special game status, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, etc. and a history display for displaying the history of past games.
In addition, as the second information, suggestions or notifications about the contents of variation patterns such as reach and pseudo-runs in relation to the special figure variation display game being executed, expectations for special results and derived results Suggestion or notification, display of the variable display game, display of the identification information displayed in the first decoration game display unit 81, and display of the game-related display, and execution in relation to the special figure variable display game being executed For example, it displays an effect-related display such as an explanation of the effect provided and an instruction to operate the effect button 25 .
Information to be displayed is not limited to character information, and may be images such as character display.
Also, for example, the display color, font, scroll direction, etc. may be determined for each of the game description, game-related display, start memory-related display, and game state display.

Further, in the game information display section 91, it is possible to switch between the first information and the second information based on establishment of a specific condition, and this specific condition can be arbitrarily set.
For example, occurrence of reach state, development to SP reach state, start of fluctuation of special figure fluctuation display game, stop of fluctuation, end of special figure fluctuation display game, derivation of result of special figure fluctuation display game, in special figure fluctuation display game Execution of a predetermined performance, start or end of a performance requiring operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 by the player, reaching a predetermined number of starting memories. , the start or end of the look-ahead effect for the starting memory, the start or end of the special game state, the start or end of the specific game state, the number of games that can be executed in the specific game state becomes a predetermined number, and the like.
By satisfying these specific conditions, it is possible to change the first information to the second information or change the second information to the first information.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. In the running memory display unit 84, the decoration special figure start memory display 83a at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game is shifted, and is displayed as the running memory display 84a. ing.
Furthermore, in the running memory display unit 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc., are suggested by the display mode of the running memory display 84a displayed in the running memory display unit 84. is possible.
That is, the memory-in-execution display section 84 provides a second display that can be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory.
In addition, the in-execution memory display section 84 can be said to be a second display that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed, and the in-execution memory display 84a is displayed only when the special figure variation display game is being performed. It can also be said that

The in-execution memory display section 84 is provided with a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game. The second display displayed on the second decoration game display section 82
In the decoration game, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the first decoration game display section 81, identification information is variably displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, and then stopped to display the result. second
The identification information (large pattern) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the decoration game display portion 82 .
Identification information (small pattern) relatively smaller than is displayed.
The direction of the variable display of the second decoration game is different from the direction in which the decoration special figure start memory display 83a moves, and the difference in the movement direction makes it easy to recognize the second decoration game. ing.

Further, the in-execution memory display section 84 is provided with a shooting direction instruction section for instructing the shooting direction of the game ball. The shooting direction instruction part 92 is designed to indicate the shooting direction by the direction of the arrow, and in FIG. 94(a), it indicates to shoot to the left (left hitting).
Furthermore, in the running memory display unit 84, the production mode notification unit 9 for notifying the current production mode
3 is provided. The effect mode notification unit 93 displays the name of the effect mode, and FIG. 94(a) indicates that it is "aaa mode". In this aaa mode, an image simulating the sun is displayed as a background image.
In this way, the in-execution memory display unit 84 displays various information related to the special figure variation display game being executed.

In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display portion 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided. These display units are designed to display the number of starting memories by numbers.
At the upper right portion of the display area of the display device 41, a stock number display portion 99 is provided to indicate the number of stocks of rights to execute a predetermined effect.
Here, up to three execution rights can be stocked, and the display mode changes according to the stocked number, as will be described later.

When the special figure variation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 94(a), as shown in FIG. The variable display of the identification information is started in each of the variable display areas 81c. In addition, the variable display of the identification information also starts on the second decoration game display section 82 .
In addition, the decoration special figure start memory display 83a at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed as the memory display 84a during execution by shifting to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the other decoration special figure start memory display 83a is displayed on the left move to

As shown in FIG. 94(c), the right end of the standby memory display section 83 can be opened like a door, and a character 631 can appear from here.
The character 631 here is a character suggesting a change in the production mode, suggesting that the production mode is changed to "bbb mode", and the shape of the character 631 is related to the background image in the bbb mode. It is a character that imitates the moon.
Then, as shown in FIG. 94(d), the effect mode is changed, the background image becomes a background image imitating the moon in the bbb mode, and the display of the effect mode notification unit 93 is also changed to "bbb".
The appearance direction of the character 631 is different from the moving direction of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the scrolling direction of the game information display section 91.
The appearance direction (rightward direction) of the character 631 is different from the changing direction (downward direction) of the identification information in the second decoration game.
That is, when the second decoration game or the display on the game information display section 91 is the first effect and the effect by the character 631 is the second effect, the direction of action of the first effect and the direction of action of the second effect are different. I have to.
This makes it easier for the player to recognize the appearance of the character 631 .

As shown in FIG. 94(e), when the ready-to-win state occurs, it is possible to change the display contents of the game information display section 91. A string is scrolled. This display content suggests the content of the SP reach which develops after this, and as shown in FIG. 94(f), it develops into the SP reach after that and the ΔΔ reach effect is executed. That is, the specific condition is established by the occurrence of reach, from the first information that is information unrelated to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed, to the second information that is information related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed information has been changed.

In the SP reach state as shown in FIG. 94(f), the standby memory display section 83 of the starting memory display section 90 is erased and only the running memory display section 84 is displayed.
As a result, the game information display section 91 is also erased, and the second information is erased.
Incidentally, when the first information is displayed on the game information display section 91, the first information is erased.
The portion of the in-execution memory display section 84 hidden by the standby memory display section 83 is the second
It functions as a game information display section 94, and the reliability of special results is displayed here.
Of course, the information displayed on the second game information display section 94 is not limited to the reliability of the special result and can be set arbitrarily.
Also, the period for erasing the standby storage display section 83 is not limited to the SP reach state period, and erasing can be performed at any timing.

By displaying various kinds of information on the starting memory display section 90 as described above, the area of the starting memory display section 90 can be utilized. In addition, during the game, the player can confirm the occurrence state of the starting memory and also confirm the information related to other games, so that the information can be grasped efficiently and the player can concentrate on the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the display mode of the starting memory display section 90 is not limited to the one described above. For example, in the above example, the decoration special figure start memory display 83a is displayed at the top of the standby memory display unit 83, and the running memory display 84a is displayed at the top of the running memory display unit 84, but the standby You may make it display special-figure starting memory display 83a and memory display 84a during execution in the inside, the side, and the lower part of the memory display part 83 during execution, and the memory display part 84 during execution.
That is, the standby memory display unit 83 may be a portion that is connected to the portion where the decorative special figure start memory display 83 can be displayed, and the running memory display unit 84 is connected to the portion that can display the running memory display 84a. Part is fine.

Also, the arrangement of the game information display section 91, the second decoration game display section 82, the shooting direction instruction section 92, the performance mode notification section 93, and the second game information display section 94 can be set arbitrarily. In addition, the information to be displayed is not limited to these and can be set arbitrarily, at least the decoration special figure start memory display 8
It is sufficient if a portion for displaying information about the game is arranged around 3a.
Information related to the game includes game description, story description of production, expectation for special result, starting memory number, second decoration game, type of production mode, shooting direction, number of times of time saving, probability state,
The game state, the number of game balls acquired in the special game state, the history of the game, etc. can be arbitrarily selected.
The importance of information to be displayed may be divided between the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84, and important information may be displayed in the running memory display section 84 as in the above example. Conversely, important information may be displayed on the standby storage display section 83 .

In addition, the game information display section 91, the second decorative game display section 82, the shooting direction instruction section 92, the presentation mode notification section 93, and the second game information display section 94 each start, end, or display information at an arbitrary timing. You can change it. The player's attention can be drawn to the remaining information by changing or terminating the display of the information.
The start, end or change timing of the display may correspond to the progress of the special figure variation display game, or may be irrelevant to the progress of the special figure variation display game. As the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation start and end, the start of the reach state, the start of the SP reach state,
For example, when a specific production is executed.

Also, the timing of starting, ending, or changing the display may be changed according to the importance of the information.
In addition, it is also possible to suggest or inform about the special figure variation display game being executed or the starting memory depending on the difference in the start, end or change timing of the display of information. For example, when the suggestion of SP reach is displayed on the game information display unit 91 before entering the reach state, it is possible to become SP reach more than when the suggestion of SP reach is displayed on the game information display unit 91 after entering the reach state. You may make it so that a property becomes high.

The scroll direction of the game information display section 91 and the movement direction of other displays may be the same or different.
As the movement direction of other displays, the movement direction of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, the character 6
31 appearance direction, the variable display direction of the second decoration game, the operation direction of the animation displayed in the running memory display 84a and the decoration special figure start memory display 83a, and the like.
Also, the direction of movement of other displays may be combined with the shooting direction, and the ball may move leftward in the case of left-handed hitting, and may move rightward in the case of right-handed hitting. Or it is good also as a direction opposite to a launch direction.

In addition, the display of the second decoration game or game information display section 91 is set as the first effect, and the character 63
Although the appearance of 1 is set as the second effect and the motion directions are different, any effect may be used as long as the first effect and the second effect are different in the motion direction.
As the first effect and the second effect, in addition to the effect displayed in the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84, the performance in the running memory display 84a and the decoration special figure start memory display 83a is also included.
For example, the direction in which the animation moves when performing an effect of displaying an animation or the like on the running memory display 84a or the decoration special figure start memory display 83a is set as the operation direction, and the running memory display 84a or the decoration special figure start memory display 83a The direction of rotation is set as the direction of action when performing an effect of rotating. Further, the direction in which the running memory display 84a and the decorative special figure starting memory display 83a operate with the digestion of the starting memory may be the operating direction.
In addition, the game information display unit 91 operates in the direction of scrolling the display, and the shooting direction instruction unit 92 operates in the direction in which the arrow indicating the shooting direction is operated. Set the direction of scroll display as the operating direction.
Further, as described above, the movement direction of the second decoration game display section 82 is the direction in which the identification information changes, and the direction of appearance of the character 631 is the movement direction of the character 631 .

Also, the effects executed in the same type of display may be the first effect and the second effect.
For example, in the running memory display 84a and the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, one of the effects may be the first effect, and the other effect may be the second effect, or two decorative special figure start memory displays 8
In 3a, one effect may be the first effect, and the other effect may be the second effect.
Also, when a plurality of characters 631 appear, their appearance directions may be changed so that the effect by one character 631 is the first effect and the effect by the other character 631 is the second effect.
Also, a plurality of game information display portions 91 may be provided, and the scroll directions of the respective displays may be set to different directions so that one displays the first effect and the other displays the second effect.

Also, although the first effect and the second effect are executed in the starting memory display unit 90, the first effect is executed in the starting memory display unit 90 and the second effect is executed outside the starting memory display unit 90. Alternatively, the first effect and the second effect may be executed outside the starting memory display section 90. - 特許庁
Further, when there are a plurality of display devices, one display device may execute the first effect, and the other display device may execute the second effect.
As the action direction in the first effect and the second effect performed outside the starting memory display section 90, the variable display direction of the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 and the character attached to the identification information are displayed. movement direction, background display movement direction, character movement direction, character scroll direction, and the like.
Also, the execution of the first effect and the second effect is not limited to the display device, and may be effected by the movement of lamps or LEDs, effected by making light emission flow, or by a movable role of the board effect device 44. An effect may be provided by actions of the objects 44a and 44b.

Also, as shown in FIG. 94(f), when the standby memory display section 83 is erased, the decoration special figure start memory display 83a may be displayed without being erased.
In this case, the pedestal may be displayed at a position where the decorative special figure starting memory display 83a is not displayed but can be displayed due to the occurrence of the starting memory. In the example of FIG. 94(f), three decoration special figure starting memory displays 83a may be displayed, and a pedestal may be displayed in a place where the fourth decoration special figure starting memory display 83a can be displayed.
This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of starting memories that can be generated.

In addition, when another image is superimposed on the starting memory display section 90 and displayed, the starting memory display section 90
When the visibility of is reduced, the degree of visibility deterioration is different for each of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a, the running memory display 84a, the standby memory display unit 83, and the running memory display unit 84 Also good. The difference in the degree of decrease in visibility can be made different by the difference in the size of the region where other images overlap, the difference in the transparency of the other images, and the like.
For example, the visibility of the memory display part 83 during standby and the memory display part 84 during execution may be made higher than the visibility of the memory display 83a during execution and the memory display during execution 84a. Since the information about the game is displayed in the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84,
In order not to hinder the visibility of this information, the degree of decrease in visibility may be reduced.

Further, regarding the display on the game information display section 91, the direction of movement of the display may differ depending on the information to be displayed.
For example, in the case of a game explanation that explains reach or the contents of a stage, the information should move to the left. Information may be moved to the right. It is also possible to move information in the vertical direction, and selection is made according to the type of information.

Also, the type of character 631 that appears and the content suggested by the character 631 can be arbitrarily set.
For example, it may suggest a change in the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83a and the running memory display 84a, and the special figure fluctuation display during execution such as the reliability of the occurrence of the reach state and the special result It may be a suggestion about a game.
Furthermore, the appearance direction and appearance position of the character 631 appearing from the starting memory display section 90 can be arbitrarily set. Also, the direction of appearance and the position of appearance may differ depending on the suggested content.
For example, in the case of changing the production mode, it appears in the right direction from the right end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in the case of the suggestion of the look-ahead production, the standby storage display unit 83 toward the corresponding decoration special figure start storage display 83a You may make it appear upwards from .
Further, when the character 631 appears, the game information display section 91 may display information to the effect that the character 631 will appear. In this case, the moving direction of the information on the game information display section 91 may be the same as the appearance direction of the character 631 .

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling game effects,
Display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information about games;
A starting winning area (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) where game balls can win,
a starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning area;
The production control means is
A starting memory display unit 90 capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the display means,
In the start memory display section 90,
The first display (decorative special figure starting memory display 83a) displayed when the starting memory exists,
A second display (standby memory display section 83) that can be displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the start memory
and there is
Information about a game can be displayed on the second display.
Therefore, the area of the start memory display section 90 can be utilized. In addition, during the game, the player can confirm the occurrence state of the starting memory and also confirm the information related to other games, so that the information can be grasped efficiently and the player can concentrate on the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling game production;
a display means capable of displaying information about a game;
A starting winning area in which a game ball can win a prize;
starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area;
The production control means is
a starting memory display unit capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the display means;
In the starting memory display unit,
a first display displayed when the starting memory exists;
a second display displayable regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory;
First information, which is information unrelated to the game being executed, can be displayed on the second display.
Therefore, the area of the start memory display section 90 can be utilized. In addition, during the game, the player can confirm the occurrence state of the starting memory and also confirm the information related to other games, so that the information can be grasped efficiently and the player can concentrate on the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production control means,
Based on the establishment of a specific condition, the information displayed on the second display can be changed from the first information to second information related to the game being executed.
Therefore, appropriate information can be displayed according to the situation, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means,
As the first display, the standby memory display (decorative special figure start memory display 83a) corresponding to the start memory one-on-one, and the start memory generated with the standby memory display corresponding to the earliest start memory at the beginning are arranged in order and displayed in a row, and move in the first direction, which is the direction in which the order is moved up each time the earliest starting memory is consumed,
Information is scroll-displayed in the first direction in the second display.
Therefore, the moving direction of the line of sight becomes the same direction, and information can be easily grasped.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling game production;
a display means capable of displaying information about a game;
A starting winning area in which a game ball can win a prize;
starting storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that are the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area;
The production control means is
a starting memory display unit capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the display means;
A first effect and a second effect different from the first effect can be executed in the starting memory display unit,
The motion direction of the first effect is different from the motion direction of the second effect.
Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish between the first effect and the second effect, the two effects can be effectively executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the first effect is a effect indicating the result of the game by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in relation to the game,
The second effect is a effect in which information can be presented by a character appearing from the start memory display unit,
The variable display direction of the identification information in the first effect is different from the appearance direction of the character in the second effect.
Therefore, it becomes easy to distinguish between the first effect and the second effect, the two effects can be effectively executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means,
Information can be presented by a character 631 appearing from the second display,
The direction in which the character 631 appears is different from the first direction.
Therefore, the character 631 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the production control means,
As the first display, a memory-in-execution display 84a displaying information about the starting memory corresponding to the game being executed can be displayed,
The second display has a portion corresponding to the in-execution memory display 84a and a portion corresponding to the standby memory display,
Information about the game being executed can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the memory display during execution 84a.
Therefore, it is possible to collectively display the information about the special figure variation display game being executed, making it easy to grasp the information.

FIG. 95 also shows an example of the effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In this production, it is possible to stock the execution right of a predetermined production.
The predetermined effect described here is intended to suggest or notify about the game, for example, the occurrence of reach state, change of identification information temporarily stopped, re-variation display, start of look-ahead effect, etc. Suggestion or notification of various changes It is possible.
Therefore, there is a high possibility that the situation will change to an advantage for the player if the number of stocks of the right to execute a predetermined effect is large, and the player will be interested in the number of stocks. there is

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to stock three execution rights for a predetermined effect, and as shown in FIG. It is
In the state shown in FIG. 95(a), the stock number is 0, and as a display mode indicating that none of the stock number display portions 99 are stocked, a two-dimensional heart-shaped display stops facing the front. There is an indication that

As shown in FIG. 95(b), when a predetermined condition is established and the right to execute a predetermined effect is obtained, an acquisition display 632 is displayed to indicate that effect. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the first stock number display portion 99 .
As shown in FIG. 95(c), in the stock number display section 99 where the acquired display 632 has been moved, the display mode indicating that the item is stocked is positioned closer to the center of the display area than the display mode when it is not stocked. At the same time, a heart-shaped display is displayed three-dimensionally in such a manner as to protrude forward, and is further rotated.
In other words, the display position and display mode of the stock number display section 99 differ depending on whether or not the stock is stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(d), when a predetermined condition is newly established and the right to execute a predetermined effect is obtained, an acquisition display 632 is displayed to indicate that fact. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the second stock number display portion 99 .
As shown in FIG. 95(e), in the stock number display section 99 where the acquired display 632 has moved, a three-dimensional heart-shaped display is displayed in a rotating display mode as a display mode to indicate that the stock is in stock.
At this time, the operation of the second stock number display unit 99 is already a rotating display.
The movement is synchronized so as to have the same rotation phase as the movement of the first stock number display portion 99 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 95(f), when a predetermined condition is newly established and the right to execute a predetermined effect is acquired, an acquisition display 632 is displayed to indicate that fact. Then, the acquisition display 632 moves to the third stock number display portion 99 .
As shown in FIG. 95(g), in the stock number display section 99 where the acquired display 632 has moved, a three-dimensional heart-shaped rotating display mode is used as a display mode to indicate that stock is being made.
At this time, the operation of the third stock number display unit 99 is already a rotating display.
The movement is synchronized so as to have the same rotation phase as the movement of the first and second stock number display portions 99 .

Then, at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 95(h), as a predetermined effect, a plurality of heart-shaped displays are released from the corresponding stock number display portion 99. As shown in FIG. The predetermined effect here is an effect for notifying that the ready-to-win state will occur, and the ready-to-win state occurs as shown in FIG. 95(i).
As the predetermined effect is executed, the display of the third stock number display portion 99 changes to a display mode indicating that the stock is not stocked.

By displaying the stock number display portion 99 of the number of stocks that can be stocked in advance, the player can easily grasp the number of stocks that can be stocked.
In particular, the player can easily grasp the upper limit of the number of stocks, and as the upper limit is approached, the player's sense of anticipation increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.
In addition, the stock number display portion 99 that is not stocked is also displayed, but by making the display position or display mode different from the stock number display portion 99 that is stocked, the player can easily distinguish and misunderstand. can be prevented.

96 and 97 also show examples of effects in the gaming machine of this embodiment.
This presentation displays a moving display 95 that moves within the display area of the display device 41, and a moving display 9
A related effect is executed based on the fact that 5 reaches a predetermined position.
As shown in FIG. 96(a), the moving display 95 is an image imitating a fish, which moves as if swimming within the display area.
As shown in FIGS. 96(a) to 96(d), a plurality of moving displays 95 can be displayed.
The greater the number of displayed , the higher the possibility of reaching the predetermined position, and the number of displayed movement indications 95 suggests the high possibility of executing related effects. .

As shown in FIG. 96(b), the moving display 95 can overlap the identification information that is being displayed in a variable manner in the first decorative game display section 81, but is displayed on the front side of the identification information. there is
Further, as shown in FIG. 96(c), the moving display 95 can overlap the identification information that is being stopped and displayed in the first decorative game display section 81, but in this case, the identification information is displayed on the front side. It is designed to be
The statically displayed identification information is an important display indicating the result of the special figure variation display game, and is displayed in front of the movement display 95 so as not to reduce visibility.
In addition, when the special figure variation display game is finished and the next special figure variation display game is not started for a predetermined period of time, the movement display 95 may be displayed in front of the stopped and displayed identification information.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 96(b) to (d), the movement display 95 can overlap various displays of the start memory display unit 90, the running memory display 84a and the decoration special figure start memory display 83a, The moving display 95 is displayed on the nearer side than these, and these displays can be visually recognized through the moving display 95 .
Various displays of the starting memory display unit 90, running memory display 84a and decoration special figure starting memory display 83
Since a is less likely to change during the execution of the special figure variation display game, even if the visibility is temporarily lowered, the effect is small, and the movement display 95 is displayed overlapping on the front side. However, they are made visible through the movement display 95 so that the visibility is not significantly lowered.

Although the second decoration game display section 82 changes to variably display the identification information, the variability display is simply continued until the result is stopped and displayed. Since it is visible, there is no problem even if the visibility is lowered.
In addition, although the game information display section 91 is changed to display information, problems may occur even if the visibility is reduced because the game explanation is not immediately necessary information and the same information is displayed repeatedly. do not have.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the movement display 95 can overlap the starting memory number display portions 85a and 85b and the background image, but the movement display 95 is displayed on the front side of these,
These displays can be visually recognized through the movement display 95 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the movement display 95 can overlap the stock number display section 99, but it is displayed on the front side of the stock number display section 99, and the movement display 95 can be seen through. The display of the stock number display portion 99 can be visually recognized.
Even if the visibility of these displays is lowered, no problem occurs.

Then, at a predetermined timing, an effect for informing whether or not the related effect can be executed is started.
The related effects include a first related effect in which the upper movable accessory 44a operates and a second related effect in which the lower movable accessory 44b operates, and there is an effect for notifying whether or not to execute each.
The performance for informing whether or not the first related performance can be executed is, as shown in FIG.
A performance display 96 simulating a waterfall is displayed from a position adjacent to 4a, and when the movement display 95 climbs the waterfall and reaches a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a and disappears, the first related performance is started. That's what it means.
Here, as shown in FIGS. 96(e) and (f), the moving display 95 climbs the waterfall, then climbs the waterfall, reaches a position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a, and disappears. When the movement display 95 reaches the position adjacent to the upper movable accessory 44a and disappears, an effect display 633 is performed at the position of the upper movable accessory 44a as shown in FIG. A first related effect is executed in which the upper movable accessory 44a operates as shown.

In this effect, the moving display 95 falls off from the effect display 96 imitating a waterfall, and the upper movable accessory 44a is displayed.
In some cases, the position adjacent to is not reached, and in this case, the first related effect is not executed. The movement display 95 dropped from the effect display 96 may be moved again in the display area, or may be erased from the display area.

In addition, the effect for informing whether or not the second related effect can be executed is changed from the state in which the movement display 95 moves in the display area as shown in FIG. Accessory 44b
When a predetermined number of movement indications 95 are gathered at a position adjacent to , and disappear, the second related effect is started.
Here, a predetermined number of movement indications 95 are gathered at a position adjacent to the lower movable accessory 44b, and then disappear. Based on this, as shown in FIG. 97(c), an effect display 634 is performed at the position of the lower movable accessory 44b, and as shown in FIG. 97(d), a second related effect is executed in which the lower movable accessory 44b moves be done.

In this effect, there are cases where the moving display 95 does not collect the predetermined number or does not disappear even if the predetermined number collects, in which case the second related effect is not executed. If a predetermined number of them are not gathered or if they do not disappear, the movement display 95 is scattered and moved again in the display area.

As described above, by notifying whether or not the related performance can be executed by the operation of the movement display 95, it is possible to suggest the possibility of executing the related performance before the related performance is executed, thereby improving the performance of the game. Interest can be improved. In addition, a decorative effect can be expected due to the presence of the moving display 95 in the display area.
In addition, since the moving display 95 can trigger either the first related effect or the second related effect,
At the time when the movement display 95 is displayed, it is not known which related performance will be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, even when the related performance is not executed as a result of the performance notifying whether the related performance can be executed or not, the moving display 95 remains in the display area, thereby leaving a sense of expectation for the execution of the next related performance. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the shape of the movement display 95 is not limited to that imitating a fish, and any shape may be used. Also, here, the shape can be changed by the fish performing a swimming action, but the shape may not change even if it moves.
Also, the movement display 95 may be changed to another type of movement display 95 by changing its color, shape, etc. while it is moving.
In addition, the movement display 95 may be generated or erased at an arbitrary timing, or may be generated or erased when a predetermined condition related to the progress of the game, such as the start of the special figure fluctuation display game or the occurrence of the reach state, is established. It may be deleted.
Furthermore, it may be erased when moved to a predetermined position in the display area.

As a case where the moving display 95 is newly generated, for example, in the effects shown in FIGS. It's okay if you don't. That is, it may be the case that execution of the first related effect is denied in the effect informing whether or not the first related effect can be executed.
By doing so, the denial of the execution of the first related performance increases the movement display 95 that triggers the execution of the first related performance, thereby increasing the possibility of executing the first related performance. It is possible to increase the expectation of the player and improve the amusement of the game.
Further, it may be possible that execution of the second related effect is denied in the effect for informing whether or not the second related effect can be executed.

Further, there may be a state in which the number of moving displays 95 is 0, and the number of moving displays 95 may be set to 0 when a predetermined condition is met. Predetermined conditions include, for example, power-on with RAM clear, power failure recovery without RAM clear, occurrence of big hit, occurrence of small hit, occurrence of support hit, and predetermined effects (specific reach, etc.) are executed. winning a lottery to erase the moving display 95, and the like.
Also, the number of moving displays 95 may be set to a specific number (initial value) when a predetermined condition is met, or may be set to a randomly selected number.
In particular, if the movement display 95 is set to 0 or a specific number when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, it is possible to indicate the possibility that the RAM clearing has occurred due to the change in the probability set value. It can be used as a clue when selecting a game machine, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the probability set value may be suggested or notified by the mode of the movement display 95 . For example, the appearance probability of the moving display 95 of a specific color may differ depending on the probability set value.
Also, the probability set value may be suggested or notified by the number of movement indications 95 . In this case, the display device 41 may display a display that notifies the number of displayed movement displays 95 . In addition, the display device 4 displays the number of movement displays 95 in the customer waiting state.
1 may be displayed.

Also, the degree of expectation for a special result may be suggested or notified by the number of moving displays 95 .
Also, the degree of expectation for the special result suggested by the execution of the first related effect and the second related effect may be different or the same.

Further, in the effect for informing whether or not the related effect can be executed, the position reached by the movement display 95 is the position of the board effect device 44, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, any position such as the center of the display area can be set.
Also, the content of the effect for informing whether or not the related effect can be executed is not limited to the one shown here, and any effect using the movement display 95 may be used.

Further, the moving display 95 is displayed behind the identification information that is stopped, but it may be displayed so that it overlaps in front of the identification information that is stopped.
Also, information other than the statically displayed identification information is displayed with the moving display 95 superimposed on the front side, but the moving display 95 may be displayed with the moving display 95 superimposed on the rear side.
Furthermore, depending on the type of information and the situation, the moving display 95 may be displayed overlapping the front side and may be displayed overlapping the rear side. For example, decorative special figure start memory display 8
As for 3a, the movement display 95 is usually superimposed on the front side, and when the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 83a is executed, the movement display 95
may be superimposed on the rear side.

Also, although the board effect device 44 to be activated is suggested by the position reached by the movement display 95, it is also possible to suggest or notify the variable winning device to be opened by the position to which the movement display 95 reaches. For example, which of the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the normal variable winning device 37 is to be opened is suggested or notified by the position reached by the moving display 95. FIG.

Also, the shooting direction may be suggested or notified by movement display operation. for example,
In the case of right-handed hitting, the player may move to the right side of the display area or move clockwise, and in the case of left-handed hitting, the player may move to the left side of the display area or move counterclockwise.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling game effects,
Display means (display device 4
1) and
The production control means is
A movement display 95 can be displayed so as to move the display area of the display means,
A first related effect can be executed based on the movement display 95 reaching the first position,
A second related effect can be executed based on the movement display 95 reaching the second position.
Therefore, it is possible to inform whether or not the related effect can be executed by the operation of the movement display 95,
The possibility of execution of the related performance can be suggested before the related performance is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as movable accessories that can be moved under the control of the effect control means, a first movable accessory (upper movable accessory 44a) and a second movable accessory (lower movable accessory 44b) are provided. ,
The production control means is
The first movable accessory is operable in the first related performance,
The second movable accessory can be operated in the second related performance.
Therefore, the moving display 95, which is displayed on the display device 41, can be coordinated with the action of the accessory, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means,
The first position is a position adjacent to the first movable accessory,
The second position is a position adjacent to the second movable accessory.
Therefore, it is possible to suggest a character that has a possibility of moving, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation.

Next, an example of the operation and effect of the special variable winning device when the special game state occurs will be described.
FIG. 98 shows a case where a specific big win (first special result) occurs and a case where a small win (second special result) occurs among the big wins. In this figure, the case of a specific big win and the case of a small win are described on the same time axis.

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game for a specific big hit or small hit ends and the variation display ends (t202), it becomes a stop display time for displaying the result (t202 to t203).
When this stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game ends, and a first special game state (big hit game state) based on a specific big hit or a second special game state (small hit game state) based on a small hit is started. (t203).
When the first special game state or the second special game state is started, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, so the shooting direction is right-handed. It is started (t203).

If the result is a small hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is released after the fanfare period (t203 to t204) has passed since the start of the second special game state (t204).
After that, it is opened for a predetermined opening time (t204 to t205), and closed (t205) as the opening time elapses.
The closing condition of the first special variable winning device 38 is until either the opening time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls wins, but since the opening time is short, it is opened in most cases. Closed over time.
In addition, in the case of a small win, the lighting of the big win notification unit 630, which is executed in the case of a big win, and the second launch instruction notification, which is executed only in the case of a big win, are not performed.
In the case of a small hit, after this, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again, and the special game state ends.

If the result is a specific jackpot, the fanfare period (t2
03 to t204), the first special variable winning device 38 is released (t204)
.
The fanfare period has the same length in the case of the specific big win and the small win, and in the case of the specific big win and the small win, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the same timing from the start of the special game state. Become.
That is, at this time, it is not possible to determine from the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 whether the result is a specific big win or a small win.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38, a big win notification effect for informing that a big win has occurred is started (t205).
The start timing of this big hit notification effect is the same timing as the timing at which the first special variable winning device 38 closes due to the lapse of the opening time in the case of a small win.
That is, the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between a specific big win and a small win at this timing, and the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 results in either a specific big win or a small win. It is possible to determine whether Therefore, from this timing, the jackpot notification unit 6
30 is turned on to inform that a big hit has been achieved.
Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the big-hit notification effect, a second shot instruction notification for instructing a right shot is started (t206).
From the above, the big hit notification effect, the lighting of the big hit notification part, the second launch instruction notification and the small hit notification effect are the first special game state and the second special game state. Eggplant.

In the case of a big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a longer opening time than the opening time in the case of a small hit, so the game balls are easily won and many prize balls are won. That is, the value given to the player is higher in the first special game state based on the big win than in the second special game state based on the small win.

In addition, regarding the performance of the game, in the special figure variation display game with a specific big hit or small hit, after executing the game performance according to each special figure variation display game, a predetermined time when the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends A specific effect is started from the front (t201).
The specific effect is continuously executed even after the special figure fluctuation display game ends and the special game state is started, and as described above, the state in which the behavior of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 differs between the specific big win and the small win. This is continued until the timing (t205).
This specific performance is a common performance in the case of a specific big win and the case of a small win, and it is difficult to discriminate whether it is a specific big win or a small win from the contents of the performance.
After the specific performance is finished, the big win performance is executed in the case of a specific big win, and the small win performance is executed in the case of a small win.

99 and 100 show an example of the specific effect.
After the game effect corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed as shown in FIG. 99(a),
As shown in FIG. 99(b), when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is over for a predetermined time, a specific effect common to the case of a specific big hit and the case of a small hit is started (see FIG. 98). t20
1).
In the specific effect, the first decoration game display section 81 is erased and only the second decoration game display section 82 is displayed for the decoration special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIG. 99(c), a common specific effect is executed until the end of the variable time, and when the variable time ends and the stop display time comes (t202 in FIG. As shown in 99(d), the first special result (here, "444
”) is displayed, the first firing instruction notification 635 for instructing the right shot is started, and the lower movable accessory 44
b works.
If the result is a small win, the second special result (here, "241") is displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 as shown in FIG.
Then, as the special game state starts, the second decoration game display section 8 is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(f).
2 is erased (t203 in FIG. 98). Other displays and the position of the lower movable accessory 44b are maintained.

In FIGS. 99(b) to (f), the contents of the specific effect are common between the case of a specific big win and the case of a small win, but the results displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 are different.
However, the time during which the result mode is displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 is short, and since the display is made up of small patterns and is displayed in the corner of the display area, it is not conspicuous and the player cannot distinguish the result. is considered difficult.
In addition, the player's line of sight is concentrated on the center and bottom of the display area by the display of the character and the action of the lower movable accessory 44b, which also makes it difficult to determine the result.

When the special game state progresses and the timing (t205 in FIG. 98) in which the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between a specific big win and a small win, the specific big win is shown in FIG. 100(a).
As shown in , a big hit effect is started as a notification effect, and lighting of the big hit notification part 630 is also started. Further, as shown in FIG. 100(b), a second firing instruction notification 636 instructing a right shot is started.

After that, when the special game state based on the specific jackpot ends, the next special figure variation display game can be started. At this time, the result mode corresponding to the specific big win displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the result mode corresponding to the specific big win displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 are different. In addition, as the result mode of the first decorative game display section 81, a result mode including a special symbol "Special" which is not used in other result modes is used.
The same result mode may be displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 .

When the result is a small hit, when the timing (t205 in FIG. 98) in which the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between the big win and the small win, the small win effect is shown as a notification effect as shown in FIG. 100(d). is started. In addition, the big hit notification unit 630 does not light up, and the second
The firing instruction notification 636 is also not performed.
After that, when the special game state based on the small hit ends, the next special figure variation display game can be started. At this time, a result mode corresponding to the small win displayed on the first decoration game display section 81;
The same result mode corresponding to the small win displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 is used.

Also, as shown in FIG. 100(e), when the shooting direction returns to left-handed due to the end of the special game state, a third shooting instruction notification 637 instructing left-handed is performed.
At this time, a notification sound that instructs to hit left is output at the first volume, and then the normal pattern start gate 3
4, the normal variable winning device 37, and the normal winning opening 35 on the right side detects a game ball, and when a right-handed hit is detected, a notification sound is output with a second volume larger than the first volume.
In the case of FIG. 100(c), the time-saving state is reached after the end of the special game state. Similarly, the third firing instruction notification may be performed.

As described above, the behavior of the first special variable prize winning device 38 is made the same until the middle of the special game state for the specific big win and the small win, and by executing the common specific effect, the special figure variable display game is realized. It is possible to make it difficult to discriminate between a specific big win and a small win from before the end to the middle of the special game state, and it is possible to execute a novel performance that the result is not clear even after the special figure fluctuation display game is over. can improve the interest of

The timing (t205 in FIG. 98) at which the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between a specific big hit and a small hit, the end timing of the specific effect, and the lighting timing of the big hit notification unit 630 are set to the same timing, but at least The end timing of the specific effect and the lighting timing of the big hit notification part 630 may be after the timing when the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between the specific big win and the small win.
Also, the start timing of the first launch instruction notification 635 may be the same timing as the opening timing of the first special variable winning device 38 . Also, the start timing of the first launch instruction notification 635 may be a timing later than the opening timing of the first special variable winning device 38, and the timing at which the behavior of the first special variable winning device 38 differs between a specific big win and a small win. After that, it is fine.

Also, the start timing of the specific effect may be after the start of the special game state. in this case,
In the special figure variation display game with a specific big hit or small hit, the first decorative game display section 81 or the second
It is preferable to make it difficult to distinguish between specific big wins and small wins by, for example, making the result mode of the decorative game display section 82 the same.
In addition, the end timing of the specific effect is determined by the specific big win and small win, and the first special variable prize winning device 3
The timing may be after the timing when the behavior of 8 is different.

In addition, the result mode displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 is common to the case of a specific big win and the case of a small win, and the results displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 are used to distinguish between the specific big win and the small win. may be regarded as indistinguishable. In this case, it is preferable to use a result mode other than the grid pattern so that a small win is not misunderstood as a big win.
Alternatively, the display of the second decoration game display section 82 may be omitted.
Also, the result mode of the first decorative game display section 81 corresponding to a specific big hit is the result mode including the special symbols that are not used in the other result modes, but the result mode of the second decorative game display section 82 is the special symbol. A result mode including a pattern may be used.
Also, the result mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the result mode of the second decorative game display section 82 corresponding to the small win may be a result mode including special symbols.

In addition, by shortening the period from the stoppage of the variation of the special figure variation display game to the opening of the first special variation winning device 38 as much as possible, it is possible to prevent the grasp of the result mode by checking the special figure indicators 51 and 52. can be done.
As a method for shortening the period, for example, the stop display time (t in FIG. 98) for displaying the result
From 202 to t203), the time is the same as or shorter than the stop display time when the result is a loss, or the time is shorter than the stop display time when the result is a jackpot other than a specific jackpot. To be mentioned.
Further, the fanfare time (from t203 to t204 in FIG. 98) may be shorter than the fanfare time when the result is a big win other than a specific big win.

Further, although it is made difficult to distinguish a specific big hit from a small hit as described above, it may be made difficult to distinguish from a small win for all big wins. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish a specific small hit among the small hits from a specific big hit as described above.
In addition, although the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for specific big wins and small wins,
The second special variable winning device 39 may be opened.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling game effects,
A special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38,
A second special variable winning device 39),
The special results include a first special result (big hit) and a second special result (small hit),
The special game state includes a first special game state that is executed when the first special result is derived, and a first special game state that is executed when the second special result is derived and is more than the first special game state. a second special game state in which the value given to the player is low;
The operation mode of the special variable winning device in the first special game state and the second special game state is the same operation mode for a certain period from the start of the special game state,
The production control means is
A specific effect, which is the same effect, can be executed during the fixed period of time in the first special game state and the second special game state.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a big win and a small win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means,
In the game with the first special result or the second special result, the specific effect can be started at a predetermined timing before the end of the game.
Therefore, even if the special figure variation display game ends, a novel effect can be executed in which the result is not yet clear, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the production control means,
After the end of the specific effect, it is possible to perform a notification effect that can determine whether it is the first special game state or the second special game state.
Therefore, the player can clearly grasp the result mode.

In addition, the production control means,
With the start of the first special game state or the second special game state, perform a first launch instruction notification for instructing the launch direction in which the special variable winning device can win,
Along with the end of the specific effect in the first special game state, a second launch instruction notification for instructing a winning launch direction to the special variable winning device is performed.
Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to surely win the game ball to the special variable winning device.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of this embodiment can be combined with the configurations of other embodiments and modifications.
For example, the information of the variable selection table group shown in FIG. Information to be displayed includes suggestion or notification of the currently set variation information table group, suggestion or notification of the next set variation selection table group, suggestion or notification of the previously set variation selection table group, and variation selection. Suggestion or notification of change of table group may be mentioned.
Also, the form of the start memory display section 90 and the form of the movement display 95 may differ depending on the group of selected variation selection tables.
Also, the change selection table group may be changed when the moving display 95 reaches a specific position.

In addition, the game information display section 91 may display the information regarding the resetting of the number of times of support shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. The information to be displayed includes suggestion or notification of information to the effect that the reset has been performed, and suggestion or notification of information on the remaining number of times of support.
Also, the form of the starting memory display section 90 and the form of the movement display 95 may be changed according to the number of remaining support times.
Also, the number of times of support may be reset when the moving display 95 reaches a specific position.

Also, the display on the starting memory display section 90 or the movement display may be used for the performance of the support hit shown in FIG. 42 and the like. For example, the game information display section 91 may suggest or notify the derivation of the support hit, or the support hit may be derived when the movement display 95 reaches a specific position.

In addition, it is also possible to execute a common specific effect in the special figure variation display game that results in a support hit and the special figure variation display game that results in a loss.
This specific effect may be started from a predetermined time before the end of the variation time of the special figure variation display game that results in a loss or a support hit, and may end during the variation time of the next special figure variation display game.
The timing at which the specific effect ends may be after a predetermined time from the start of the next special figure variation display game, or may be until the timing at which the normal variation winning device 37 opens in the case of a support win.

In addition, regarding the notification of the number of times of support to be given shown in FIG. The number of support times may be notified.
Further, regarding the change in visibility shown in FIG. 52 and the like, the moving display 95 may overlap another display to change the visibility of the other display.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 41 display device (display means)
36 Starting prize mouth (Starting prize area)
37 Ordinary Variable Winning Device (Starting Winning Area)
83 Standby storage display section (second display)
83a Decoration special figure start memory display (first display)
84a In-execution memory display 90 Start memory display unit 100 Game control device (start memory means)
300 production control device (production control means)

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A game control means for comprehensively controlling a game;
Production control means for controlling game production;
A first display means controlled by the game control means and capable of displaying information about a game;
A second display means controlled by the effect control means and capable of displaying information about a game;
A starting winning area in which a game ball can win a prize;
a start memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that become the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area;
The game includes a first variable display game and a second variable display game,
The game control means is
the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be individually displayed on the first display means;
The production control means is
a starting memory display unit capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the second display means;
a decoration variable display game that variably displays the ornament identification information can be displayed on the second display means when either the first variable display game or the second variable display game is executed;
In the starting memory display unit,
a first display displayed when the starting memory exists;
a second display displayable regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory;
The second display is capable of displaying first information, which is information unrelated to the decoration variation display game being executed ,
The production control means is
When the first variable display game is over, the ornament identification information matching the result of the first variable display game is displayed on the second display means as the result of the ornament variable display game, and the second variable display is displayed. displaying the ornament identification information matching the result of the second variable display game as the result of the ornament variable display game on the second display means when the game is over;
Specifying the decoration identification information displayed on the second display means when the second variable display game is executed after the first variable display game is executed, and matching the result of the first variable display game. Even when the decoration identification information and the result of the second variable display game displayed on the first display means are inconsistent, the second display means displays the specific decoration identification information on the first display means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the ornament variable display game is started from the specific ornament identification information corresponding to the execution of the second variable display game without setting the ornament identification information consistent with the result of the variable display game .

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production control means for controlling game production;
a display means capable of displaying information about a game;
A starting winning area in which a game ball can win a prize;
a start memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that become the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area;
The production control means is
a starting memory display section capable of displaying information about the starting memory can be displayed on the display means;
In the starting memory display unit,
a first display displayed when the starting memory exists;
a second display displayable regardless of the presence or absence of the starting memory;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second display is capable of displaying first information which is information unrelated to a game being executed. The production control means is
2. The information displayed on the second display can be changed from the first information to second information related to the game being executed based on establishment of a specific condition. The game machine described.

Images